Cadillac CATERA 1997 Owner's manual

Cadillac CATERA 1997 Owner's manual
I
9 9 7
0
vv
N E R '
S
M A N U A L
-.
The 1997 Cadillac Catera Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the air bag system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains howto start and operate your Catera.
3-1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adiust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your DrivingandtheRoaa
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how
to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells whatto do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire
or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tellsyou how to keep your Catera running properly and looking good.
7-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Cadillac
for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also givesyou information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page
7- 12.
8-1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listingof almost every subjectin this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM and the GM Emblem,
CADILLAC andthe CADILLAC Emblem are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the timeit
was printed. We reserve the right to make changesin the
product after that time withoutfurther notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor
Car Divisionwhenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your Catera, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’reon the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new
owner can use it.
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux proprihtaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7
U.S.A. Litho in
Part No. 25665479 A Second Edition
ii
1996
Corporation
@Copyright
MotorsGeneral
Reserved
Rights
All
~~
~
~~
~
1 9 9 7
P R E M I E R E
E D I T 1 0 N
Congratulations.
Cadillac hasbeen designing and building luxury cars95for
years.
With the Catera,
you have selectedthe first Cadillac ever to
be engineered and manufactured in Germany.
It is a unique expressionof Cadillac luxurywith a sensibility to
European ride and handling. With proper care, your will
Catera
deliver
mile after mile of exciting, performance oriented luxury driving.
Drive safelyand enjoy.
Luxury truly can
be fun.
' '
1
I
iv
I
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls foryour vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is theIndex in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
I
1
A
These mean there1s something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
V
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
i
I
NOTICE:
These mean thereis something thatcould
damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
see CAUTION
When you read other manuals, you might
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
vi
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you mayfind on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
A
Q
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
POWER
WINDOW
,\I/,
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
A
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
BRAKE
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
-1-1
FUSE
LIGHTER
(a)
HORN
R
SPEAKER
-
DAYTIME
0
RUNNING *
LAMPS ' * *
FOG LAMPS
COOLANT
TEMP
e9
CAUSTIC
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
0
$0
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE W
VENTILATING
FAN
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
b
FUEL
m
)tr
b
B
(@)
vii
&
NOTES
&
G
-
-a*
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats inyour Catera and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-11
1-16
1-16
1-17
1-24
1-25
1-25
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re forEveryone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to WearSafety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag Systems
1-32
1-35
1-37
1-39
1-47
1-50
1-50
1-51
Rear Seat Passengers
Center Passenger Position
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you aboutthe seats -- how to adjust
them, and also about reclining front seatbacks, lumbar
adjustments, heated seats and head restraints.
Manual Front Passenger’s Seat
Lift the lever to tilt the front portion of the seat cushion
up or down. Release thelever to lock the seatinto place.
This feature is available onthe passenger’s seat only.
Lift the bar underthe front passenger’s seat to unlockit.
Slide the seat to where you want
it and release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body to besure the seat
is locked into place,
1-2
Manual Lumbar Support
The lumbar controls are
located on the outboard side
of each front seat. They
provide additional support
to your lower back and
work independently of
other seat controls.
To raise the seat cushion up or down, press one of the
rocker switch buttons located on the outboard side of the
passenger’s seat. The top button raises the seat cushion
and the bottom button lowers the seat cushion.
Use manual or power seat controls first to get the proper
seating position. Then proceed with the lumbar adjustment.
The upper and lower seatback can be adjusted using the
two small hand-wheel controls. The top hand-wheel
control adjusts the upper seatback and the bottom
control adjusts the lower seatback. Turn the controls
forward to increase support and rearward to
decrease support.
Keep in mind thatas your seating position changes, as it
may during long trips, so should the position of the
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-3
Power Seats
The power seat controls are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions.
Lift up or push down on the front of the control to
adjust the front portion of the cushion up or down.
Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust the
rear portion of the cushion.
To adjust the seat height, lift up or push down on the
center of the control.
To move the seat forward or rearward, slide the
control in the desired direction.
This feature is available on all driver’s seats and is
optional on passenger’s seats with leather interiors only.
1-4
Note that if you try to adjust the driver’s seat and it
doesn’t move, try opening thedriver’s door. This will
re-activate power to the driver’s seat. (Power to
the
driver’s seat “times out’’ after 30 seconds. Power to the
passenger’s seat is always present.)
Memory Seat and Mirrors (Option)
If a failure inthe power supply system occurs, the power
seats can be manually adjusted by inserting the crank
handle into theslot located below the seat cushion (as
shown in the above illustration). Turn the crank handle
clockwise until you’ve reached your desired seating
position (note that manually moving the seat requires
turning the crank handle many times).
The crank handle is provided in the tool kit located in
the trunk (with the jack).
Adjust the driver’s seat to a comfortable position. Also
adjust the interior and exterior mirrors. Press memory
button “M’ and memory button “1” at the same time.
These buttons are located on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat. Seat and mirror positions may be
programmed for two additional drivers by repeating the
above steps andpressing memory button “2” or “3”
instead of memory button 1.
1-5
If your vehicle is in PARK (P), you can recall mirror and
seating positions by pressing and holding one of the
three memory buttons. This will adjust the seat and
mirrors to where you have previously programmed
them. Seat and mirror movement is immediately stopped
if the memorybutton is released or if a seat or mirror
control is moved.
Note that the exterior mirrors will only adjust when the
ignition is turned on.
Heated Front Seat (Option)
The controls are located
next to the radio on the
center console. Press this
button to turn on the
heating element in the
seat. The seatback and
cushion are warmed
until they approximate
body temperature.
A telltale light in the button reminds you that the heating
system is in use. The heated seats can only be used when
the ignition is turned on.
Reclining Front Seatbacks
This feature is found on
the passenger’s seat only.
The manual recliner
control is located on the
outboard side of the
passenger’s seat below the
lumbar controls. See
“Manual Lumbar Support”
earlier in this section.
To move the seatback forward, turn the hand-wheel
control forward. Note that this seatback folds forward all
the way down, if needed, to provide extra storage.
Turn the control rearward to recline the seatback.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting in a reclined positionwhen your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even
if you buckle
do their job when
up, your safety belts can’t
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’tdo its jobbecause it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap belt can’tdo its job either. In a crash the
belt couldgo up over your abdomen.The belt
forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones.
This could cause seriousinternal injuries.
is in motion,
For proper protection when the vehicle
well back in the
have the seatback upright. Then sit
seat andwear your safety belt properly.
1-7
Power Recliner
Removable HeadRestraints
This feature is available on all driver’s seats and is
optional on passenger’s seats with leather interiors only.
I
These controls are located
on the outboard sideof each
front seat. Press the control
forward or rearward to
adjust the seatback.
Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the topof the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The head restraints tilt forward and rearward also.
1-8
I
A CAUTION:
If a head restraint is not installedon the seatback
it could be
or stored in the vehicle properly,
thrown about the vehicle ina crash orsudden
maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured.
Remove the head restraints only when you need
to foldthe seat, and be sure thatthe head
restraints are stored securely in
the trunk.When
the seat is returned to the passenger position,be
sure the headrestraints areinstalled properly.
For more cargo space orto fold down the front
passenger's seat, you may need to remove the head
restraints. Press both release buttons at the top of the
seatback and slide the head restraint out of the height
adjust tubes.
The head restraint should be stored securely on the
driver's side of the trunk as shown.
Replace the head restraint when you have finished
carrying cargo or when the passenger's seat is returned
to its normal upright position.
1-9
Rear Seats
Folding the Rear Seat
~
With the rear folding seatbacks, you can carry long
cargo by folding down part or all of the rear seat. To
unlock the rear seatback, press the pushbutton at the top
of the seat and fold the seatback forward.
To return the seat to the passenger position, lift up on the
seatback and push it rearward until it latches.
1-10
After returning the seat to the passenger position, pull
forward on the seatback to make sure it is locked into
place. Also, return the safety belts to their original
positions, so they will be available for rear seat
passengers to use.
The panel behind the rear seat armrest also folds. Turn
the knob counterclockwise and pull the panel forward to
gain access to the trunk.
Heated Rear Seat (Option)
The heated rear seat
controls arelocated at the
rear of the center console
under the air outlets. Press
the button once to turn on
the heating elements and
press the button again to
turn the system off.
A telltale light in the button indicates the system is in
use. The heated seats can only be used when the ignition
is turned on. The heating elements shut off
automatically when the ignition is turned off.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
A CAU-ION:
Don’t let anyoneride where heor she can’t wear
a safety belt properly.If you are in acrash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejectedfrom it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your
safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
1-11
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in theseareas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow peopleto
ride inany area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts.Be sure
everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your Catera has a light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
1-12
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a badone.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In manyof them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badlyhurt
or killed.
After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. Inmost crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
c
1
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-13
I
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.
1-14
I
The person keeps going until stoppedby something.
In a real vehicle, it could be
the windshield ...
..........
....
...... .
...
.........
......
...................... .
.........
k
or the instrument panel
...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That's why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-15
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
@’
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle afteran
a safety belt?
accident if I’m wearing
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But youcan unbuckle a safety belt,.
even if you’reupside down. And yourchance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
@
If my vehiclehas air bags, why shouldI have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Everyair bag
system ever offered for salehas required the use of
safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to getthe most
protection. That’s true notonly in frontal collisions,
but especially in side andother collisions.
&:
A:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive
far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t yourfault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being
a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as baddrivers.
Most accidents occur within
25 miles (40 km) of home.
And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths
occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts arefor everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that thereare special things to know about safety
belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller
children and babies.If a child will be riding in your
Catera, see the partof this manual called “Children.”
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to knowwhich restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-16
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats”in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the beltacross you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pullthe belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender’’ at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-17
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulderbelt.
The lap part of the belt shouldbe worn low and snugon
the hips,just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stopor crash, or
if you pull the belt very quickly outof the retractor.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right foryou.
To move it down, grasp the sides, push in andmove the
height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the
adjuster up just by pushing up on the bottom of the
height adjuster. After you move the adjuster to where
you want it, try to move it down without pushing in to
make sure ithas locked into position.
Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portionof the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away fkom
your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder.
1-19
&.’
What’s wrong with this?
r
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderisbelt
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
fit against your body.
shoulder belt should
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protectionthis way.
1-20
@
What’s wrong with this?
IAC
-
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this.In a crash,
the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. The
belt forceswould be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could causeserious internal
injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the
buckle nearest you.
I
A:
I
I
I
1
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-21
&= What’s wrong with this?
I
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at alltimes.
1-22
You can be seriouslyinjured if you wearthe
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move toofar forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force
to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severelyinjure internalorgans
like your liver or spleen.
@
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured
by a twisted belt.In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the
belt to spread impact forces.
If a beltis twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly, or ask
your dealer tofix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-23
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work foreveryone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt,just push the button onthe buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, besure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be wornas low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-24
The best way to protect the fetus is toprotect the
mother. When asafety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetuswon’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
If your vehicle has sideimpact air bags, it will say AIR
BAG on the air bag covering on the side of the driver’s
and right front passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag systems:
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position,”
earlier in this section.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will
lock. If it does, letit go back all the way and start again.
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and
side impact air
bag systems.
Your Catera has airbags -- a frontal air bag for the
driver and another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have side impact air
bags -- a side impact air bag for the driverand another
side impact air bag for the right front passenger.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have an airbag. Wearing your safety beltduring
a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejectedfrom it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints’’ to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety beltsbut don’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-25
rn
CAUTION: (Continued)
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to work only inmoderate
to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle
hits something. Theyaren’t designed toinflate at
all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. The side impact air bags for the driver
and right front passenger are designed toinflate
only inmoderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle, They
aren’t designed to inflate in frontal, in rolloveror
in rear crashes. Everyone inyour vehicle should
wear a safety belt
properly whether or not
there’s an airbag for thatperson.
IA CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate with
great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If
you’re too closeto an inflating air bag, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you
in
position for air bag inflation beforeand during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
air
bags. The driver should sitas far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Front occupants shouldnot lean on or sleep
against the door,
--
I
I A CAUTION:
rn
An inflating air bag can seriouslyinjure small
children. Always secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual
called “Children”and the caution label on the
right front passenger’s safety belt.
1-26
There is anair bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel,
which shows the
air bag symbol.
How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s frontal air bag is in themiddle of the
steering wheel.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
1-27
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
driver’s seatbackclosest to the door.
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatbackclosest to the door.
A
1-28
I
a CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between
an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering and don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
When should an air bag inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. The frontal air bags are designed to
inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight
into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold
level is about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The
threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle
design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this
range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move
or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will
be higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers,
side impacts, or rear impacts, because inflation would
not help the occupant.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air
bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes involving a front door. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.’’ The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are not
designed to inflate in frontal ornear-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only
deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and
near-frontal impacts. For side impact air bags, inflation
is determined by the location of the impact and how
quickly the side of the vehicle deforms.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware
are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door.
many types of collisions, including frontal or near
frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air
bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for
the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags,
and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the
driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air bags.
How does an air bag restrain?
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal air
bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
the air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you in
1-30
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, the
side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver and
right front passenger’s side impact air bags -- will be
hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into
contact with you maybe warm, but not too hot to touch.
There will be some smoke and dust coming from the
vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t
prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
0
I
U
I
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people witha history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyonein the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after anair bag inflates,then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the frontal air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment.
e Let only qualified technicians work on your air
bag systems. Improper service can mean that an
air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag
covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag
module and seatback for the driver’s and right
front passenger’s sideimpact air bag. Do not
open or break the air bag coverings.
1-31
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Cadillac
Rear Seat Passengers
Air bags affect how your Catera should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your Catera dealer and the Catera
Service Manual have information about servicing your
vehicle and the air bag systems. To purchase a service
manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in
the Index.
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat arehurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
A
JAUTION:
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
n
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow felt,
wires wrapped with yellowtape oryellow
connectors. Theyare probably part of the air bag
systems. Besure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-32
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s howto wear one properly.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety
Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure
the release button on the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly.If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up
on the shoulder part.
1-33
n
n
The lap part of the belt shouldbe worn low and snugon
the hips,just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less likely
to slide under thelap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt shouldgo
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts the
of
body are best able totake belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-34
Each position next to thewindows has a shoulder belt
height adjuster. Move the shoulder belt adjuster to the
height that is right for you.
Press the release button and move the height adjuster to
the desired position. After you move the adjuster
to where
you want it, try to move it down without pressing the
release button to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portionof the belt is
centered on your shoulder.The belt shouldbe away from
your face and neck, but not falling
off your shoulder.
'A CAUTION:
I
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder isbelt
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Center Passenger Position
1-35
Lap Belt
I 1
To make the belt shorter, pullits free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
When you sit in the center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which hasno retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plateand pull it along the belt.
Buckle, position and releaseit the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t longenough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at theend of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be ableto unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-36
Children
Smaller Children and Babies
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
IAC
U-ION:
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whether it is
the right type and size for your child. A very
young child’ship bones are so small that a
regular belt mightnot stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be overthe
child’s abdomen.In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enoughfor one is alwaysproperly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
1-37
at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 124b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby inan infant restraint.
I
Never hold a baby inyour arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, ina crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-38
Child Restraints
Be sure thechild restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, itwill have a label saying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also hasto be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to dothat.
Where to Putthe Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
A child ina rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right frontpassenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because
the back of a
rearfacing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag. Always securea rearfacing
child restraint in the rear seat.
You may, however,secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right frontseat. Before you secure
a forward-facing child restraint, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as itwill go. Or,
secure the child restraint in the rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sureto properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-39
Top Strap
If your child restraint has a top strap,
it should be
anchored. If you needto have an anchor installed, you
can ask your Catera dealer to putit in for you. If you
want to install an anchor yourself, yourdealer can tell
you how to do it.
Canadian law requiresthat child restraints have a top
strap, and that thestrap be anchored.
If your child restraint has a top
strap, your dealer can
obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation
instructions specifically designedfor this vehicle. The
dealer can then install the anchorfor you. In Canada,
this work will be donefor you free of charge. Or, you
may install the anchor yourself using
the instructions
provided in thekit.
1-40
Securing a Child Restraintin a Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be u,sing the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the childrestraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety beltquickly if you ever had to.
If the shoulder belt goes in frontof the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-41
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back intothe
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
7.
Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position
U
You’ll be using the lap belt.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pullingit along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instruct-ions say.
4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-43
6. To tighten the belt, pull its freeend while you push
down on the child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure. If it isn’t, secure the
restraint in a different place in the vehicle and
contact the child restraint maker for their advice
about how to attach the child restraint properly.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It willbe ready to work for an adult or larger
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back as itwill go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
A child in arearfacing child restraint canDe
seriously injuredif the right front passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of a
rearfacing child restraintwould be very close to
the inflating air bag. Always securerearfacing
a
child restraint in the rear seat.
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes infront of the child’s face or
neck, put it behindthe child restraint.
1-45
I
5. Buckle the belt. Makesure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you
ever had to.
1-46
6. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out
of
the retractor to set the
lock.
Larger Children
7. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while youpush down on the child restraint.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it secure.
is
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
.~
1-47
Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they
are restrained inthe rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
F
1-48
Never do this.
Here two childrenare wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properlyspread the impact forces.In a
crash, the two children canbe crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one personat a time.
@
What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is
so small that the shoulder beltis
very close to the child’s face
or neck?
A:
Move the child towardthe center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder beltstill is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would havethe restraint that belts provide.If the
child is so small that the shoulder beltis stillvery
close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to
place thechild in the center seat position, theone
that has onlya lap belt.
A
CAUTION:
INever do this.
Here a child issitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in way,
this in
a crash the child might slide
under the belt. The
belt's force wouldthen be applied right on the
child's abdomen.That could cause seriousor
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child's thighs. This applies belt force to the child's
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-49
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
If the vehicle’s safetybelt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Now and then, make sure the safety beltreminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keepa safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
But if a safety belt isn’tlong enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’sfree. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will.
be just foryou, and just forthe seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it,just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a newone right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not needregular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need newbelts.
A u t o l i v G m b H , Dachau, 081311295-0
S c h l o B s t r a m m e r . B A M - P T 0502
Umgang nur
durch
geschultes
Personal
erlaubt!
CAUTION!
BUCKLE
PRETENSIONER
CONTAINS
FLAMMABLE SOLIDS. TO HELP AVOID
PERSONAL INJURY OR MALFUNCTION
DO NOT OPEN, REMOVE OR PUT INTO
ANOTHER VEHICLE. TO BE HANDLED
+BY QUALIFIED PERSONS ONLY!
A
0
0
If you ever see a yellow label on the driver’s or the right
front passenger’s safety belt buckle, that means to
replace the buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
new buckle assembly will be there to help protect you in
a collision.
If belts are cut ordamaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ 11 need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.
1-51
fi
1-52
NOTES
,==
-a.\
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your Catera, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2- 3
2-6
2- 10
2-1 1
2-12
2- 13
2- 14
2-15
2-16
2- 17
2-19
2-24
2-25
2-27
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry System (RKE)
Trunk
Theft
Theft-Deterrent (System)
Immobilizer
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
.Engine Coolant Heater
Automatic Transmission Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-32
2-32
2-39
2-46
2-48
2-50
2-5 1
2-52
2-55
2-5 8
2-6 1
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Windows
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Cellular Telephone
Sunroof
Universal Transmitter
Instrument Panel
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Keys
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
2-2
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and
all other locks. (Note that
there is no lock cylinder
for thetrunk or the
passenger’s door.)
Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall out. When adoor is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easilyenter through an unlocked
door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lockyour doors, and you willbe far
better off whenever youdrive your vehicle.
--
If you’ve lost your key or need to have a new one made,
you will have to contact your Catera dealer for the
correct key code.
NOTICE:
Your Catera has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever
lock your keys insideand you may have to
damage your vehicle to get in.Be sure you
have extra keys.
--
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your keyor the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. This will avoid setting off the
optional theft deterrent alarm.
2-3
Slide the lock lever down to
lock the door from the
inside. To unlock the door,
slide the lock lever up.
Power Door Locks
Central Door Unlocking System
When unlocking thedriver's door, you can also unlock
the other doors, including the fuel door, by holding the
key in a turned position for several seconds (turn the key
counterclockwise). Pressing the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter twice in a row will also open the
other doors.
2-4
Press the power door lock switch to lock
or unlock all of
the doors at once.
Automatic Door Locks
Close the doors andturn on the ignition. Every time you
move the shift lever outof PARK (P), all of the doors will
lock. The doors will unlock every time you stop the vehicle
and move the shift lever into PARK (P). If someone needs
to get out while your vehicle is notin PARK (P), have that
person use the manual or power lock. When the door is
closed again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual
or power lock to lock the door again.
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
Each RKE transmitter supplied with your vehicle can be
programmed to suit each driver’s door lock preference.
The two RKE transmitters are identified on the back
with either a “I” or a “2”, which allows either driver to
program their own door locks.
With RKE, the automatic door lockscan be programmed
to lock when the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P)
and unlock when the shift lever is moved back into
PARK (P). The door locks can also programmed
be
to
remain locked whether or not the shift lever is returned
to the PARK (P) position.
With the ignition on, the transmission in PARK (P)
and the brake pedal pressed in, you are now ready to
begin programming.
and will remain locked when the shift lever is moved
back into PARK (P).
Keep in mind that pressing the lock or unlock buttons on
the RKE transmitter several times in a row (about 12
times) may cause the vehicle’s system to lock youout. If
this happens, wait about 30 seconds before trying to
enter your vehicle again.
Rear Door Security Lock
:.‘%is.:.
‘D
Your Catera is equipped
with rear door security
locks that help prevent
passengers from opening
the rear door of your
vehicle from the inside.
To use this lock:
To enable the doors to lock when shifting out of PARK (P)
and to unlock when shifting back into
PARK (P), press
the lock button onthe RKE transmitter four times within
five seconds.
To disable the door unlock feature when shifting back
into PARK (P), press the unlock button onthe RKE
1. Move the lever on the door all the way downinto the
transmitter four times within five seconds. The doors
ENGAGED position.
will lock when theshift lever is moved out of PARK (P)
2. Close the door.
2-5
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
Leaving Your Vehicle
The rear doors of your vehiclecannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
If you are leaving your vehicle, open the door,
set the
locks from theinside, get out andclose the door.
When you wantto open a rear door when the security
lock is on:
Remote Keyless Entry System (RKE)
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door lock:
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the door
from the outside.
2. Move the lever all the why Bp.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
With this feature, you can
lock and unlock thedoors,
open the trunk, unlockthe
fuel door and turn on your
vehicle’s interior lamps
using the remotekeyless
entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
Anti-Lockout Feature
Leaving your keyin any ignition position with any
door open willdisable the use of the power door lock
switches. If you close the door, youcan lock it using the
RKE system. Itis always recommended that you remove
the ignition key whenlocking your vehicle.
Note that the anti-lockout feature can be overridden
by holding the power doorlock switch for three seconds
or longer.
Your remote keyless entry system operates on
a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
The rangeof this system is about 10 feet (3 m). At times
you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for
any remote lock control system. If the transmitter does
not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle
for thetransmitter to work, try this:
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Takea few steps to theleft or right,
hold the transmitter higher, andtry again
If you’re still having trouble, see your Catera dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See theinstructions that follow.
2-7
Operation
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
When you press this symbol to unlock the
driver’s door, the parkinglamps on your vehicle will
blink twice. Pressingit again within five seconds will
unlock the other doors. Pressing this button will also
disarm the optional theft-deterrent system and turnon
the interior lamps (for approximately 20 seconds).
Each remotekeyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitteris lost or stolen, a replacementcan be
purchased through your dealer. Once yourdealer has
coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not
unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only two
transmitters matched to it.
8 When you press this symbol to lock the doors
(including the fuel door), the parking lamps will blink
once. This alsoarms the optional theft-deterrent system.
6 b Press this symbol to open the trunk.
Press this buttonto unlock the fuel door.
Note that pressingthe transmitter buttons numerous
times (approximately 500 times) out of the vehicle’s
operating range may cause the transmitter not to work.
Replacing the battery and pressing the transmitter
buttons 10 or more times out of range will also cause the
transmitter not to work.To reset the transmitter, you
must be within the vehicle’soperating range. Press and
hold the trunk buttonand, within one second, press the
lock button. Continue to hold both buttonsfor
approximately three seconds. See your Catera dealer for
service if your transmitter still doesn’t work properly.
2-8
Battery Replacement
Under normal use,the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter shouldlast about four years.
You can tell the batteryis weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehiclebefore the transmitter works,
it’s probably timeto change the battery.
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your
body
transferred to these surfaces
may damage
the transmitter.
7 -
b
1. Use a coin to pry open the transmitter.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with a CR2032
battery. Using the wrongsize battery can damage the
transmitter. Make sure the battery is positioned with
the “plus” (+) facing down.
3. Align the internal pieces of the transmitter, including
the cover. Snap together to reinstall.
1
Trunk
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open becausecarbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t seeor smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousnessand even death
If you must drive with the trunk lid openor if
electrical wiringor other cable connections must
pass through the seal betweenthe body and the
trunk lid:
0 Make sure all windows are shut.
0 lhrn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed withthe setting
on AUTO and the temperature between
65°F (18°C) and 85°F (29°C). That will
force outsideair into your vehicle. See
“Comfort Controls’’ in the Index.
0 If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, openthem all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index.
2-10
Trunk Release
To use this feature,
your vehicle must be
in
PARK (P). Press the trunk
release button locatedon the
center console next to the
radio to open the trunk.
You can also press the trunk button on theRKE
transmitter to access the trunk compartment.Your
Catera doesn’t havea trunk key lock cylinder.
If your Cateraloses power
temporarily, youcan
manually openthe trunk
using the trunk release
handle. The handle is
located on the underside
of the trunk lidon the
driver’s side.
To access, fold down the driver’s side rear seat and
reach through to the trunk compartment to find the
release handle. For more information on how to fold the
rear seats, see“Folding the Rear Seat” in theIndex.
Pulling the handle opens the trunk.
Parking at Night
Theft
Parking Lots
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your Catera hasa number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your key? What if you
have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your trunk
or glove box.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
0
Lock the glove box.
When you park yourCatera and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your
ignition and transmission. And remember to lock
the doors.
2-11
Theft-Deterrent System (Option)
If the ignition isoff and
any door is open, the
SECURITY light will flash
reminding you to activate
Remember, the theft-deterrentsystem won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a powerdoor lock
switch or the RKE transmitter.
To avoid activating the alarm byaccident:
The vehicle should be locked with the keyafter the
doors are closed if you don’t want to activate the
theft-deterrent system.
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door using thepower door lock or the RKE
transmitter. The SECURITY light should come on
and stay on.
3. Close all the doors. The SECURITY light should go
off within approximately 30 seconds.
The horn will sound andthe lamps will flash for several
minutes when thedoor or trunk is opened without the
key or RKE transmitter. The horn also sounds if the
locks are damaged.
2-12
Always unlock a door with a key or use the RKE
transmitter. (Pressing the unlock button on the
RKE
transmitter disables the theft-deterrent system.)
Unlocking a door any other way will activate the
alarm. Cycling the ignition without disarming
the
theft-deterrent system willalso activate the alarm.
If you activate the alarm byaccident, unlock the driver’s
door with your key. You can also turn off thealarm by
using the RKE transmitter. The alarm won’t stop if you
try to unlock a door in any other way.
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
2. From outside the vehicle, with the door open, lock
the vehicle using the power door lock or the RKE
transmitter and close the door. Wait 30 seconds.
Immobilizer
Your vehicle is
equipped with a
passive theft-deterrent
system.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual lock
and open the door. The horn will sound and the
headlamps will flash.
If the alarm does not sound when itshould, check to see
if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To
replace the fuse, see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
Index. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you may
need to have your Catera serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always activate the
optional theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) thls
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and(2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
The system works when you turn the keyto the
RUN (11) position. The key uses a transponder that
matches an immobilizer control unit in your vehicle.
The correct key will start the vehicle.
When the system senses that someone is using the
wrong key, it may start but it will not continue to run. If
someone tries to start your vehicle again or uses another
key during this time, theshutdown will start over again.
This discourages someone from randomly trying
different keys with different transponders in an attempt
to make a match.
If the engine cannot be started, turn the key in the
ignition to the RUN (11) position. Wait approximately
two seconds; then start your vehicle again.
If the engine still won’t start, try another key. You may
also want to check the fuses (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index). If the engine doesn’t start with
the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle
does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
Catera dealer.
If you lose or damage a keyor you cannot start the
engine, see your Catera dealer. If a key is lost, bringall
remaining keys to your dealer for re-programming. In
an emergency,call the Cadillac Roadside Service
Program at 1-800-882-1112.
2-14
New Vehicle “Break-In’’
NOTICE:
Your modern Catera doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better inthe long
run if you follow these guidelines:
Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new liningscan mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get newbrake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towinga Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
--
--
Ignition Positions
With the key in the
ignition switch, you can
turn the switch tofour
different positions.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuckin LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, isit all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel leftand right while youturn the
key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to forceit could break the key or the
ignition switch.If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
LOCK
Before you put the keyin, the ignition will
be inthe LOCK position. This is the only positionin
which you can remove the key.This position locks the
ignition, steering wheel and transmission. It’s a
theft-deterrent feature.
Keep in mind that you may
have to turn the steering
wheel a little in order for the key to be removed or
turned freely from the LOCK position -- this is normal.
(0):
2-15
OFF (I): This position lets you turn off the
engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if
your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN (11): The ignition is on in this position.RUN is
used for driving your vehicle.
START (III): This position starts the engine.
To lock the steeringcolumn, remove the key while in
LOCK. Rotate the steering wheel until you hear click.
a
Retained Accessory Power
The radio is the only accessory on your Catera that
may
be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned
to OFF.
Power to the fuel door,
trunk release and door locksis
available at all times. The power window controls and the
sunroof controls are active until a door is opened
-- there
is no time limit as long as the doors remain closed.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift PARK
to
(P) ifyour Catera
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turnyour
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery
to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, holdyour key in
START for about three seconds at a time until your
engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each
try to help avoiddraining your battery.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for aboutthree seconds. If the Catera starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
The electrical cord for the engine coolant heater is in
front of the air cleaner filter and underthe headlamp
cover, on the passenger’s side of the engine.
ENGINE COOLANT
HEATER ELEC
CORD
/
/
/
/
I NOTICE:
Your engine is designed
to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you couldchange the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check withyour dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual that tells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Catera” in the Index.
AIR CLEANER
ASSEMBLY
HE
AS
I
HEADLAMP
COVER
In very cold weather, 0°F (- 18“C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged ina minimum of
four hours prior tostarting your vehicle.
To Use the Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
/\ CA-‘TIC’J:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could causean electrical shock. Also,the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, usea
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
2-18
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before keep
to it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keepthe coolant heater plugged
in? Theanswer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your Catera dealer in the area where you’ll be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for
that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
2-
PARK (P): This locks the transmission drive shaft. It’s
the best position to use when you start the engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
A
CAUTION:
I
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leaveyour vehicle whenthe engine is
running unless youhave to. If you have leftthe
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could beinjured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on
fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If
you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
2-19
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) range
before starting the engine. Your Catera has a
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI).
You have to fully applythe regular brakes before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in
RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),ease pressure
on the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P)as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you wish.See
“Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in this section.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
To rock your vehicle backand forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N):The engine doesn’t connect with
the wheels when driving in NEUTRAL (N). Use
NEUTRAL (N) to restart your vehicle when you’re
already moving or when your vehicle
is being towed.
2-20
I
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)is
dangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could losecontrol and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N)while your engine is racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to the transmission causedby shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the
engine racing isn’t covered byyour warranty.
1
DRIVE (D): Use this for normal driving. If you need
more power for passing, and you’re:
Going less than 35 mph (55 kmh), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to the next gear.
THIRD (3): Driving in THIRD (3) is not used for
normal driving. It offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of DRIVE (D):
0
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
When going down a steep hill.
FIRST (1): This gives you even more power (but lower
fuel economy) than SECOND (2).You can use it on
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift
lever is put in FIRST (l), the transmission won’t shift
into first gearuntil the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If the rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive.
This might happen if you werestuck in verydeep
sand or mud or you were up against a solid
object. You could damage the transmission.
Also, if youstop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use the brakes to hold your vehicle
in position on a hill.
SECOND (2): Driving in SECOND ( 2 ) gives you more
power. Use it on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use the brakes off and on.
2-21
-
Sport Mode Button
For a firmer shift
and increased
performance, you may
choose the sport mode.
This button lets you
change from a normal
driving mode to a
sport driving mode. It
is located on the shift
lever handle.
rress the "S" button once to select the sportfeature.
Press it again to return to thenormal driving mode.
2-22
When you startthe engine, your vehicle willbe in
normal mode. For general driving conditions, use the
normal mode. It will remain in normal unless you
select
the sportfeature.
A telltale light on the
instrument panel will
come on when the
sport mode is selected.
Third-Gear Start
Press this button to
provide more traction
when you are starting
on ice orother slippery
surfaces. It only
operates when the shift
lever is in DRIVE (D).
The button is located
next to the shift lever
on the console.
The transmission will be in THIRD (3) when the vehicle
begins to move. After starting in THIRD (3), the vehicle
will upshift normally.
This feature is for improved traction only when the road
surface is slippery and is not intended for continuous use
or when the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice, snow or
gravel. Drive as usual for normal road conditions.
This feature automatically turns off when any of the
following conditions occur:
When the ignition is turned off.
If the shift lever is placed in PARK (P), THIRD (3),
SECOND (2) or FIRST (1).
If you press and hold the accelerator pedal past its
resistance point for more than two seconds.
When speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h).
0
Once the vehicle reaches 67 mph (108 k d h ) .
To turn this feature off, press the button again.
Whenever you start your vehicle, the transmission is in
the normal mode.
2-23
If you start to drive away with the parking brake set, the
BRAKE warning light stays on. See"Brake System
Warning Light" inthe Index for more information.
Parking Brake
To release the parking brake,hold the brake pedal down
with your foot and pull the parking brake lever up until
you can press the end release button. Hold therelease
button in as you move the brakelever all the way down.
NOTICE:
1
.. .
0
To set the parking brake,hold the regular brake pedal
down withyour foot and pull up on the parking brake
lever. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on.
2-24
Driving with the parking brake on can cause the
rear brakes to overheat.
You may have to replace
of
them and you could also damage other parts
your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer andare parking on a hill, see
"Towing a Trailer"in the Index. This section shows
what to dofirst to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. Youor others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you’re pullinga trailer, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Console Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
. .
3. Pull the button on the shift lever handle up and then
push the shift lever all the way toward the front of
your vehicle intoPARK (P). Release the button.
4. With your right foot still holding the brakepedal
down, set the parking brake.
5. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
6. Remove the ignition key and takeit with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the key in your hand,
your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-25
Leaving Your Vehicle Withthe
Engine Running
It can be dangerousto leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
PARK
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully
in (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you haveto.
L
If you have to leave your vehicle with theengine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shiftlever intoPARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedaldown. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-26
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill andyou don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the
vehicle mayput too much force on the parking pawlin
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another
vehicle push yoursa little uphill to takesome of the
pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so
you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
Your Catera has a Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI). You have to fully apply the regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P) whenthe ignition is
in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all theway into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into thegear you want.If you ever
hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of
PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF. Open and close the driver’s
door to turn off the Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) feature.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 8.
3. With both hands, squeeze the base of the console
shift lever together (as shown).
4. Pull the upper part of the base out first and then slide
out the lower part of the base.
5. Lift the shift lever cover up to get it out of your way.
2-27
Parking Over Things ThatBurn
6. At the bottom of the shift lever, you will see a
yellow tab. With one hand, push the tab to unlock the
shift lever.
7. Shift to NEUTRAL (N) with the other hand.
8. Start the engine (if you can) and then shift to the
drive gear you want.
9. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-28
A CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don't park
over papers, leaves, dry
grass or other things that
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t seeor
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might haveexhaust coming inif:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle wasdamaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the roador over road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspectexhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with allthe windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
1
Idling the engine withthe climate control system
off could allowdangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (seethe earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting.One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park ina
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in placecan be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” inthe Index.)
--
--
I
2-29
Windows
Power Windows
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fullyin PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leaveyour vehicle whenthe engine is
running unless youhave to. If you’ve leftthe
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could beinjured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re fairly
on
level ground, alwaysset your parking brake after
you movethe shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the propersteps to be sureyour vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hilland if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index.
2-30
The controls are located next to the console shift lever.
Tap thecontrols forward or rearward to raiseor lower
the windows in increments. To express-open the
window, press the control rearward for about one second
and then release. If you wantto stop the window asit is
lowering, tap the control. Pressing thecontrol forward
for about one second and thenreleasing it will
express-close the window.
When you stop your vehicle and turn the ignition key to
LOCK, you can still use the power windows. The
electrical power to operate the windows will not shut off
until a door is opened -- there is no time limit to this
feature. As soon as a door is opened, power window
movement will stop immediately.
Rear Window Lockout
Pressing this button
rearward will disable the
rear passenger window
controls. This is a useful
feature if you havechildren
as passengers. Press the
button forward to allow
your passengers to reuse
their window controls.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on your vehicle has been disconnected or
is not working, you will need to
reprogram each power
window in order for theexpress-open and close features
to work.
To program each window, press and hold the power
window control until the window has fully opened.
Continue holding the control down for approximately
five more seconds after the window is completely down.
The window is now programmed. Repeat this process
for each window.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If a hand, a head or another object is in the way of the
power window express-closing, the window will
immediately stop at the obstruction and express-open to
a preset factory position.
Note that pressing and holding the power window
control button will override the anti-pinch feature.
Horn
The horn can be sounded by pressing either horn symbol
on the steering wheel. The symbols are locatedat about
the 9 and 3 o’clock positions.
Tilt Wheel
lbrn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Turn and Lane Change Signals
To signal aturn, move the lever all the wayup or down.
The lever returns automatically when the
turn is complete.
P
D
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. Raising the steering wheel to the
highest level gives your legs more room when youenter
and exit your vehicle.
Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you to
tilt the wheel. Adjust the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and then release the lever to lock the wheel
in place.
2-32
This arrow on the
instrument panel will flash
in the direction of the turn
or lane change.
Raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it
there until the lane changeis
complete. The lever returns
when it’s released.
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turnor
lane change may be caused by a front burned-out signal
bulb (this does not occur with arear burned-out bulb).
Other drivers won’t see the turn signal. Replace
burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible accidents.
Check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
Index) and for burned-out bulbs if the arrow fails to
work when signaling a turn.
Headlamp High/Low Changer
Windshield Wipers
With the twilight sentinel on or with the lamp control
dial turned to the headlamp position, push the turn
signal lever on the driver’s side of the steering wheel
away from you to turn on the high-beam headlamps.
L
L
This light on on the
instrument panel will be on,
indicating high-beam usage.
I
b
Pull the lever back to the original position to return to
low-beam headlamps. For more information, see
“Headlamps” later in this section.
Flash-To-Pass
This lets you use the high-beam headlamps to signal the
driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Pull the turn signal lever toward you andrelease. The
high-beam headlamps will briefly turn on and then off.
WIPER: Move the lever on the passenger’s side of the
steering wheel up and down to control the wipers.
MIST Tap the lever up and thenrelease it fora single
wipe cycle. Formore cycles, pull and hold the lever.
= (HIGH): Move the lever all the way up for a fast
wiper speed.
-
(LOW): The third position up controls the low
wiper speed.
-- (DELAY): This is fora controlled delay setting.
Rotate the control dial on the lever to increase or
decrease the delay between wipecycles.
o (OFF): This position turns off the wipers.
2-33
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, replace them with new blades.
Heavy snow or ice canoverload the wiper motor.A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice toprevent an overload.
Pull and hold the washer
lever to wash the
windshield. Release the
lever when you have
enough fluid. The wipers
will clear the windshield
and either stop or return to
your preset speed.
Windshield Washer
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
2-34
A telltale light on the instrument panel will be displayed
when the washer fluid reaches a low level.
See “Low
Washer Fluid Warning Light” in the Indexfor
more information.
Driving without washerfluid can be dangerous.A bad
mud splash can block your vision and you could hit
another vehicle or go off the road. Check the washer
fluid level often.
Cruise Control
I
1
With cruise control,you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can help on long trips. Cruise
control does not workat speeds below about 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Cruise control shuts off when you apply the brakes or
when the OFF button at the end of the cruise lever is
pressed.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safely at a steady speed.So,
don’t use your cruise controlon winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes
in tire tractioncan cause needless
wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. (See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.) When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn thecruise
control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
1. Accelerate to the speed you want.
2. Press the SET/ACCEL button at the end of the lever
and release it.
3. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
2-36
Setting the cruise controlat a desired speed and then
applying the brakeor pressing the OFF button at the end
of the cruise lever will endthe cruise function. Once
you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can
press the RESUMEDECEL button for about half a
second toreset. This returns you to your desired
preset speed.
Remember, if you hold the SETIACCEL button in
longer than half a second, the vehicle will accelerate
until you release the button or apply the brake. You
could be startled and even lose control.So unless you
want to go faster, don’t hold the buttonin.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
0
Press the RESUME/DECEL button at the end of the
lever until you reacha desired lower speed,then
release it.
0
To slow down in very small amounts, tap the
RESUMEDECEL button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There aretwo ways to go to a higher speed:
0
0
Use the accelerator pedal to goto a higher speed.
Push the SET/ACCEL button at the end of the lever
and then release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at ahigher speed.
Press the SETIACCEL button until the desired speed
is reached. The new speed is maintained when the
button is released. (To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the SET/ACCEL button
repeatedly. Each time you do this, your vehicle will
go about 1 mph (1.6 kmh) faster.)
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take yourfoot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to thecruise control speed you set earlier.
The accelerate feature will only workafter you have
set the cruise control speed by pushing the
SET/ACCEL button.
2-37
Using CruiseControl on Hills
Exterior Lamps
How well thecruise control will work on hillsdepends
upon your speed, load andthe steepness of the hills.
When going upsteep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain yourspeed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speeddown. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and
don't use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Controls
There are two ways to end cruise control:
0
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
0
Press the OFF button at the end of the cruise lever.
Erasing SpeedMemory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased only
when you turnoff the ignition. (Keep in mind that the
set speed memoryis not erased when you pressthe OFF
button at the endof the cruise lever.)
2-38
These controls on the left side of the instrument panel
operate the following lampsystems:
a
Lamp control dial (operates all lamps except
twilight sentinel, fog lamps and brightness control). Pull
this dial toward you to turn on the interior lamps and
push the dial back in to turn the lampsoff.
700< Parking lamps, front andrear sidemarker
Headlamps
lamps, taillamps, license plate lamps, ashtray lamps,
backlighting to the radio controlsand instrument
panel lights.
Rotate the lamp control dial clockwise to turn on the
low-beam headlamps.
-
4
so
Headlamps.
$0 Fog lamps.
TWILIGHT
Twilight sentinel.
OFF Turns the twilight sentinel system off.
@ Instrument panel brightness control.
Turn the lamp control dial clockwise to the first position
to turn on the parking lamps, front and rear sidemarker
lamps, taillamps, license plate lamps, ashtray lamps,
instrument panel lights and backlighting to the center
console controls.
Rotate the lamp control dial counterclockwise to turn
the lamps off.
To turn on the high-beam headlamps, the low-beam
headlamps must already be on. Push the turn signal lever
on the left side of the steering wheel away from you to
engage the high-beam headlamps. Pull the lever toward
you to return to the low-beam headlamps. For more
information, see “Headlamp High/Low Changer” earlier
in this section.
Rotate the lamp control dial counterclockwise to turn
the headlamps off.
Note that if the headlamps are activated while driving
and then you turn your vehicle’s ignition off while the
lamp dial is stillturned on, the headlamps will turn off.
Turn the lamp control dial counterclockwise to turn the
headlamps off and to stop the reminder chime from
sounding. (If you want the headlamps to remain on, you
must manually turn the lamp control dial off and then
back on to the headlamp position. The headlamps will
stay on until manually turned off again.)
2-39
Wiper ActivatedHeadlamps
Daytime Running Lamps
This feature activates the low-beam headlamps, parking
lamps, sidemarker lamps and taillamps after the
windshield wipers have been in use for about
20 seconds.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
The wiper activated headlamps light the way in poor
weather and also make your vehicle more visible to
other drivers. If the wipers are on and the ignition switch
is turned off, the headlamps will immediately turn off.
The headlamps will also deactivate if the windshield
wipers have been turned off for about 20 seconds.
Lamps On Reminder
You will hear a warning buzzer if you open the door
while leaving the lamps on, if the manual headlamp
control is activated. An exception to this is when you’re
using the twilight sentinel.
2-40
The DRL system will make the high-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness when:
0
your vehicle’s ignition is in RUN or START,
0
the low-beam headlamps are off (the manual lamp
switch is in the off or park lamp position) and
0
your vehicle’s transmission is shifted out of
PARK (P).
When DRL are on, only the high-beam headlamps (at
reduced brightness) will be on. No other exteriorlamps
such as the parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on
when the DRL are being used. The instrument panel
won’t be lit up either.
When the twilight sentinel is on and it’s dark enough
outside, the high-beam headlamps (at reduced intensity)
will change to low-beam headlamps. When it’s bright
enough outside, the regular lamps will go off, and the
high-beam headlamps change to thereduced brightness
of DRL.
To idle your vehicle with the headlamps off, turn off the
twilight sentinel switch and shift the transmission into
PARK (P). Placing your vehicle in PARK (P) disables
the DRL. The DRL will stay off until you shift out of
PARK (P).
If you’re not in PARK(P)
and the twilight sentinel
system is turned off (and it’s
dark enough outside), the
DRL will remain active and
this light on the instrument
panel will appear as a
reminder that headlamps
are required.
The following conditions will override the DRL:
your vehicle’s transmission is shifted back into
PARK (P) with the ignition in RUN or START,
the low-beam headlamps are turned on (using the
manual lamp control dial),
the wiper activated headlamps are in use (DRL will
come back on 20 seconds after wipers have turned off),
using the flash-to pass feature and
turning on twilight sentinel.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
2-41
Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better
vision in foggy or misty
conditions. Press this button
to turn the fog lamps on and
press the button again to
turn the lamps off. (The fog
lamps only work whenthe
parking lamps or the
low-beam headlamps
are on.)
This light on the instrument
panel will come on when
the fog lamp button
is pressed.
$0
If you switch on the high-beam headlamps, the fog
lamps will turn off. They’ll turn back on again when you
switch to low-beam headlamps.
Cornering Lamps
The cornering lamps come on when theheadlamps or
parking lamps are on and you signal a turn. They
provide more light for cornering.
2-42
Twilight Sentinel
This featureis below the
lamp control dial on the left
side of the instrument panel.
It automatically switches
the parking lamps and
low-beam headlamps on
and off by sensing how dark
it is outside.
To operate the twilight sentinel, the ignition must be in
the RUN or START positionand the twilight sentinel
must be turnedon by pressing the OFF button (an
indicator light in the button will beoff when the twilight
sentinel is activated). If the system senses it is dark
outside, the lamps will turn on. Thelamps turn off when
the system detects that it is bright outside.
If you rotate the control dial all the way up, the lamps
will remain on for about three minutes after the ignition
has been turned to theOFF or LOCK position. If you
rotate the control dial all the waydown, thelamps will
go off quickly. You can adjust the delay time from a few
seconds up to three minutes.
To turn twilight sentinel off, pressthe OFF button again.
The indicator light in the button will beon. Thislets the
driver know that the system has been turned off.
Twilight sentinel also turns off if the ignition is turned to
OFF or toLOCK.
1
This light in the instrument
-panel will come onif the
ignition is onand:
the headlamps have not been manually turned
1
the twilight sentinel senses it is dark outside,
the twilight sentinel is off and
the transmission is not in PARK (P).
2-43
Light Sensor
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
This control dial is locatedto the right of the fog lamp
button. As you rotate the control dial up, the instrument
panel lights will brighten.
Illuminated Entry
This system turns on the courtesy lamps
(dome lamps
and door entry lamps) for about 20 seconds when anyof
the following occur:
0
The light sensor for the twilight sentinel is located in the
center of the front defogger grille. If you cover the
sensor, it will read “dark” and the parking lamps and
low-beam headlamps willcome on.
if you manually unlock your vehicle with the key,
if any door is opened or closed or
if you press the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter.
Illuminated entry immediatelyends when your vehicle’s
ignition is turned to the RUNor START position.
2-44
Reading Lamps
Map Lamps
The reading lamps are located in the roof.These lamps
and the interior courtesy lamps come on when any door
is opened and itis dark outside.
This lamp assembly is located in the overhead console
near the optional sunroo.f control. Press either button to
turn the driver’s or passenger’s side lamp on and press
Placing the button in the center position enables the lamps the button again to turn the lamp off.
to come on when any door is opened. Pressing the button
toward the rear of your vehicle disables the lamps when
any door is opened. With the button set toward
the front of
the vehicle, the lamps will always be on.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
2-45
Mirrors
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror
I
At night, when theglare istoo high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a
few seconds). The mirror will return toits clear daytime
state when the glare is reduced.
Time Delay
This feature prevents rapid changing of the mirrorfrom
the night modeto the day mode as you drive under
lights and through traffic.
Cleaning Photocells
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the front
and rear photocells that makethe auto-dimming
feature work.
This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
headlamps behind you. Aphotocell on the back of the
mirror senses whenit is becoming dark outside. Another
photocell built into the mirror surface senses when
headlamps are behind you.
2-46
Power Remote Control Mirror
Your Catera has an electric
heated mirror control
located on the driver’s
door armrest. The heat is
activated when the rear
window defogger is turned
on. A small indicator light
near the mirror control pad
turns on when the mirror is
being heated.
Move the rocker switch to the leftto choose the driver’s
side mirror or move the switch to the right to select the
passenger’s side mirror. To adjust the mirror, push the
control pad in the direction you want the mirror to go.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
Manual Folding Outside Rearview Mirrors
The driver’s and passenger’s outside mirrors move
forward and rearward (“break-away”) to help prevent
injury and/or damage to your vehicle.
Also note that the small symbol appearing on each
mirror lets you know that the mirrors are heated
mirrors. If this symbol does not appear on the mirror,
you do not have the heated mirror feature. To heat the
mirrors, press the rear window defogger button.
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
I
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit.a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
2-47
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
The glove box is located in front of the passenger’s seat.
To lock the glove box door,insert the key into the lock
cylinder and turnit clockwise. Turn the key
counterclockwise to unlock the door.
Note that the glove boxis air conditioned. This helps
to keep snack items cool while traveling. Use the slide
control insideof the glove box toturn the air conditioning
on and off. Moving the slide control over the small hole
turns the air conditioning off and moving the control away
from the holeturns the air conditioning on.
Map Pockets
The mapktoragepockets are located on each front
door as well as on the passenger’s and driver’s front
seatbacks. Also locatedon the driver’s door map pocket
is a coin holder.
2-48
The front storage area comes with a small storage bin
and a dual cupholder that unfoldsfor use.
Convenience Net
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
The front ashtray is located below the radio. Press on the
cover to access it. To clean the ashtray, press the black
tab to the right of the tray to release it. Now pull up on
the tray to remove and clean it.
To replace the ashtray, hold the black flap (cover) down
and slide the ashtray toward the front of the vehicle.
Using both hands, press the ashtray down to snap it
into place.
To use the rear ashtray, lift the lid.
I NOTICE:
The convenience net is on the floor of the trunk, Put
small loads, like grocery bags, under the net. It can help
keep them from moving around during sharp turns or
quick starts and stops.
Don’t put papers or other flammable items
into the ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them, causing a
damaging fire.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the
trunk as far forward as you can. When not using thenet,
hook it to the metal loops, securing it to the floor.
2-49
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray. Press
it all the way in andrelease. It will pop back by itself
when it’s ready to light.You also have a lighter on the
back of the center console near the rearseat air outlet.
Sun Visors
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can makeit overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
Turn the sunshade down andlift the coverto see the
mirror. Lighting is automatic.
2-50
Cellular Telephone (Option)
Your vehicle has been prewired for dealerinstallation of
a Catera dual-mode (analog/digital) cellular portable
telephone. Voice activation and hands-free operation
are standard features. For more information, contact
your Catera dealer. A user’s guide is provided with
the telephone.
Assist Handles
A handle above each door can be used when getting out
of your vehicle.
Garment Hooks
For convenience, you will find garment hooks attached
to each assist handle.
Floor Mats
Your Catera is equipped with rubber-backed front and
rear floor mats. Keep them clean by vacuuming and
using a spot cleaner, if necessary. Do not machine wash.
Sunroof (Option)
The express-open sunroofprovides an airy, spacious
feel to your vehicle’s
interior and can also
increase ventilation. It
includes a sliding glass
panel and a sliding
sunshade. Power is supplied
to the sunroof when the
ignition key is turned to the
RUN position.
When you stop your vehicle and turn the ignition key to
LOCK, you can still use the sunroof. The electrical
power to operate the sunroof will not shut off until a
door is opened -- there is no time limit to this feature.
As soon as a door is opened, sunroof movement will
stop immediately.
2-51
G
C
L
A. Fully Open
B. About 80% Open
C . About 50% Open
D. About 25% Open
E. Fully Closed
E About 40% Tilted
G. Fully Tilted
2-52
Rotating the control dial to position A fully opens the
glass panel and sunshade. The sunshade can also be
opened by hand. If you want to stop the roof in a
partially opened position, rotate the control dial to any
position between A and E. The positions range from
about 25% open to approximately 80% open. Rotate the
dial to position E to fully close the glass panel. To close
the sunshade, pull it forward.
To raise the glass panel, rotate the control dial
counterclockwise to one of the three tilt positions.
The positions range from about 40% tilted (F) to fully
tilted (G). To close the vent, rotate the dial clockwise to
position E.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If a hand, a head or another object is in the way of
the power sunroof closing, the glass panel will
immediately stop at the obstruction and open to a
preset factory position.
Note that pressing and holding the power sunroof
control dial up will override the anti-pinch feature.
Manual Operation
Programming the Sunroof
If the battery on your vehicle has beendisconnected or
is not working, you will need toreprogram the sunroof
following these steps.
With your vehicle’s ignition on:
1. If the sunroof is closed, rotate the control dial to
position E. Press the dial for about five seconds.
If the sunroof is open, rotate the control dial to
E and
press until the glass panel has closed.Now continue
pressing the dial for approximately five more seconds.
2. Rotate the control dial to position G and press until
the sunroof isfully tilted.
If a failure in the power supply system occurs, the
sunroof can, be manuallyclosed by inserting a screw
driver into the slot as shown. Turning the screwdriver
counterclockwise will close thesunroof.
The screwdriver is provided in the tool kitin the trunk
(with the jack).
3. Now rotate the control dial to position E and keep
pressing until the sunroof is fully closed.
2-53
~
~~
~
- .
4. Rotate the dial to position A and press until the
sunroof is fully open.
Universal Transmitter (Option)
5. Return to position E and keep pressing the control
dial until the sunroof has fully closed.
Note that after programming,
if the sunroof keeps opening
after you attempt to close it, you will need to repeat Steps
2 through 5 (up to three times if needed). If you are still
having problems, consult your Catera dealer for service.
Also keep in mind that if something is in the way of the
sunroof closing during programming and you continue
to program the sunroof, the sunroof will only open or
close to the spot where the obstruction occurred. You
will needto reprogram the sunroof again, making sure
that the object has been removed.
The three Universal Transmitter buttons are located
under the inside rearview mirror.
This transmitter allows you to consolidate the functions
of up to three individual hand-held transmitters. It will
operate garage doors and gates, or with the accessory
package, other devices controlled by radio frequency
such as home/office lighting systems.
The transmitter will learn andtransmit the frequencies
of most current transmitters and is powered by your
vehicle’s battery and charging system.
Programming the Transmitter
Do not use the universaltransmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
safety feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
(2) this device must acceptany interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. door you are programming.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
programming the transmitter. Followthese steps to
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
program up to three channels:
this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
1. If you have not previously programmed a transmitter
channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down
the two outside buttons on the universaltransmitter
until the red light begins to flash rapidly
(approximately 20 seconds). Then release the
buttons. This procedure initializes the memory and
erases any previous settings for all three channels.
2. Decide which one of the three channels you want
to program.
2-55
3. Hold the endof the hand-held transmitter against the
front surface of the universaltransmitter so that you
can still seethe red light.
4. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter
button and the desired button
on the universal
transmitter. Continue to hold both buttons through
Step 5.
5. Hold down bothbuttons until you see the red light
on the universaltransmitter flash slowly and then
rapidly. The rapid flashing, which could take up to
90 seconds, indicates that the universal transmitter
has been programmed. Release both buttonsonce the
light starts to flash rapidly.
2-56
If you have trouble programming the universal
transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described and that the battery in the
hand-held transmitter is not dead. If you still cannot
program it, rotate the hand-held transmitter end over end
and try again. The universal transmitter may not work
with older garage door openersthat do not meet current
Federal Consumer Safety Standards. If you cannot
program the transmitter after repeated attempts, consult
your Catera dealer.
Be sure to keep theoriginal hand-held transmitter
in case you need to eraseand reprogram the
universal transmitter.
Note to Canadian Owners:During programming, the
hand-held transmitter may stop transmitting after one or
two seconds. If you are programming from one of these
transmitters, you should press and re-press the button on
the hand-held transmitter every two seconds without
ever releasing the button on the universal transmitter.
Release both buttons when the red light on the universal
transmitter begins to flash rapidly.
Operating the Transmitter
Press and hold the appropriate button on the universal
transmitter. The red light comes on while the signal is
being transmitted.
Note that the effective transmission range of the
universal transmitter may differ from your hand-held
transmitter and from one channel to another.
Erasing Channels
To erase allthree programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons until the red light begins to flash.
Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be
reprogrammed using the procedure for programming
the transmitter explained earlier.
2-57
The Instrument Panel: Your Information System
2-58
The instrument panel is designed to let you know at a glance how your Catera is running. You’ll know how fast
you’re going, how much fuel you’re using and many of the other things you’ll need to know todrive safely and
economically. The main components of the instrument panel are:
C. Driver’s Side Air Bag
K. Hood Release
L. Hazard
Warning
Flasher Button
M. Fuel Door Release Button
D. Instrument Cluster
N. Heated Front Seat O d O f fButton
A. Air Outlets
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
E. Washer
Windshield
0. Ashtray
Lever
E Comfort Controls
P. Radio
G. Passenger’s Side
BagAir
Q. Trunk Release Button
H. Lamp Controls
R. Traction Control O d O f fButton
I. Horn
Box
S. Glove
J. Audio Steering Wheel Controls
2-59
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States version shown, Canadian similar
2-60
Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (M).
The
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in eithermiles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
in
the red area or engine damage may
occur.
Trip Odometer
Engine Speed Limiter
The trip odometer tells how far you have driven since
you last reset it. To set it to zero, press the knob located
below the speedometer on the instrument cluster.
This featureprevents the engine from operating at too
many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine’s
rpms are critically high, the fuelsupply to the engine
is shut off. When the engine speed slows, the fuel
supply will come on again. This helps prevent damage
to the engine.
Tachometer
This gage indicates the
engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
w
RPM x 1000
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
2-61
Warning lights come on when there may beor is a
problem with oneof your vehicle’sfunctions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when youstart the
engine just to let you knowthey’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’sfunctions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with yourvehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when youare driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warninglights
and gages. They’re a big help.
2-62
Safety Belt ReminderLight
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt lightwill
also come on and stay on
for about four seconds,
then it will flash for about
60 seconds. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled,
neither the chime northe
light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The lighttells you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag
modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For
more information on the airbag system, see “Air Bag”
in the Index.
i
This light will come on for
a few seconds when you
start your engine. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
The air bagreadiness light should come on for a few
seconds when you turnthe ignition key to RUN.If the
light doesn’t come onthen, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.
Charging System Indicator Light
When you turn the key to
START, this light will
come on briefly to show
that the generator and
battery charging systems
are working.
If this light stays on, you need service and you should
take your Catera to the dealer at once. To save the
battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly.Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
2-63
Your Catera’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the otherpart can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the lightcomes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedalmay go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “TowingYour Catera” in
the Index.)
If the warning light comes on, there couldbe a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
I
Brake System Warning Light
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition keyto RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
2-64
CAZ
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
BRAKE
United States
/d
When the ignition ison, the brake system warninglight
will also come on when
you set your parking brake.The
light will stayon if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. Ifit stays on after your parking brakeis fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
Voltmeter
You can read battery
voltage on the voltmeter. If
it reads less than 12 volts or
more than 16 volts while the
engine is running, and it
stays there, you mayhave a
problem with the electrical
charging system.
I6h
VOLTS
Have it checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter
reading in the lower warning zone could drain or
damage the battery. Driving with the voltmeter reading
in the upper warning zone could cause bulbs to burn out
(especially headlamp bulbs), various vehicle modules to
shut down (due to overload protection) and the
possibility of a battery acidleak.
If you idle the engine for a while, the voltmeter reading
might move into the red zone. If the reading stays in the
red zone while you are driving, you may have a problem
with the electrical charging system. Have it checked.
While the voltmeter reads in the redzone, the battery
may not be able to power certain electrical accessories,
like ABS. (If this happens, the ABS light will come on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” in
this section.)
If you must drive a short distance with the voltmeter
reading in a warningzone, turn off all the accessories,
including the comfort controls and the audio system.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
ABS
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light(s) will
come on when youstart
your engine and may stay
on forseveral seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF.Or, if the
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as
possible and turnthe ignition off. Then start the engine
2-66
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or
comes on again whileyou’re driving, your Catera needs
service. If the regular brakesystem warning light isn’t
on, you still have brakes, but you don’t haveanti-lock
brakes.
If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, you
don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’sa problem with
your regular brakes. See “Brake System Warning Light”
earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warninglight should come
on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN.If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn youif there is a problem.
Traction Engaged
When your traction control system is limiting wheel
spin, the traction control system warning light will flash.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this warning light
is flashing,so adjust your driving accordingly.
Traction Control System Warning Light
This warning light should
come on briefly as you start
the engine. If the warning
light doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s
a problem. The warning
light will flash when
the system senses a
traction change.
If it stays on, orcomes on and stays on steady when
you’re driving, there may be a problem with your
traction control system and your vehicle may need
service. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system warning light may come on
for the following reasons:
If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control system
will turn off and the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light tells you that the
engine has overheated. You
should stop the car and turn
the engine off as soon as
possible. A warning chime
should also sound if this
light comes on.
As a check, the light should come on for a few seconds
when you start the engine. In the section “Problemson
the Road,” this manual explains what to do.See “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
I
2-68
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
&
This gage shows the engine
coolant temperature.If the
gage pointer movesinto
the red area, the engine is
too hot!
C
This reading means the same thing as the warning
light -- the engine coolant has overheated. You should
stop thecar and turn theengine off as soon as possible.
The section “Problems onthe Road” in this manual
explains what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
Low Coolant Warning Light
4
This warning light should
come on while you are
starting the engine. If the
light doesn’t come on, have
it repaired.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Check Engine Light)
CHECK
ENGINE
Your Catera is equipped with a low coolant level sensor
(switch and float) that is designed to detect when your
vehicle’s coolant level drops below the set limit. If the
low coolant level sensor (under the coolant surge tank)
detects that the level drops while the engine is running,
the low coolant indicator will light and remain lit until
the ignition switch is turned off. Check the coolant level
and add coolant as needed. The lightshould turn off as
soon as the coolant level is at its proper operating range.
Your Catera is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. (In Canada,OBD I1 is replaced by
Enhanced Diagnostics.) The CHECK ENGINE light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
2-69
If the LightIs Flashing
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be
as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, asa check to show youit is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
0
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealeror qualified service center diagnosis
and service is required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detectedon your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
2-70
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
0
Reducing vehicle speed.
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
0
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soonas itis possible.
If the light stops flashing andremains on steady, see “If
the Light Is OnSteady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it issafe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds andrestart the
engine. If the light remains on steady,see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following, If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the LightIs On Steady
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
You may be able tocorrect the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If so, be sure to fuelyour vehicle withquality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to runas efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
Did you just drivethrough a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electricalsystem
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Are you low on fuel?
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of
air aresucked into the fuel line
causing a misfire. The
system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel capproperly. It
will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuelbrand you use.It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
2-71
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
isn’t flowing throughthe engine properly. You could be
low on oil and you might havesome other system
problem.
Oil Pressure LighVGage
80
2
J
This light and gage tell you if there could bea problem
with the engine oil pressure.
The gage shows the engine oil pressure in poundsper
square inch (psi). Canadian vehicles show pressure in
kilopascals (kPa).
The oil light goes on when you turn the key to RUN or
START. It goes off once you start the engine. That’s a
check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t come on,
be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if
something goes wrong.
2-72
I
Don’t 1 :p driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do,your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire.You or others could beburned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Brake To Shift Light
Check Oil Light
This light shoula comeon
briefly while you are
starting the engine. If the
light doesn’t come on,
have it repaired. If the light
comes on while starting and
stays on, the engine oillevel
should be checked.
This light will come on to
remind you that you must
press the brake pedal to
shift out of PARK (P).
BRAKE TO
SHIFT
I
Prior to checking the oillevel, be sure your vehicle has
been shut off for several minutes and is on a level
surface. Check the oil level and bring it to the proper
level. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
vehicle’s cruise control.
Note: A false check oil light may be generated when
parking on steep grades.
The oil level monitoring system only checks the oil
during the brief period betweenturning the key on and
engine start. It does not monitor the engine oil level
while the engine isrunning. Additionally, an oil level
check is only performed if the engine has been turned
off for a considerableamount of time allowing the oil
normally in circulation to drain back into the oil pan.
CRUISE
2-73
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This light will come on
when you turn on the
ignition and the windshield
washer fluid container is
less than one-third full.
2-74
Trunk Ajar Light
This light will come on if
your vehicle’s trunkis not
completely closed.
Low Fuel Light
Fuel Gage
If the fuel level is low
(approximately two gallons
of fuel remain in the fuel
tank), a light will come on
and stay on until you add
fuel. It will also come on for
a few seconds when you
first turn on the ignition as a
check to show it’sworking.
If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed.
The fuelgage shows
approximately how much
fuel isin the tank. It works
only when the ignition is in
the RUN position.
Rere are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and do
not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
-
-
--nsmission Warning Light
At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads E
The gage may change when you turn, stop or
speed up.
0
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition is turned
on. If the light remains on
or lights up while driving,
there may be a fault in the
automatic transmission.
Have your vehicle serviced.
2-75
Leveling Indicator Light
This light comes on steady
when the rear load level in
your vehicle changes.
LEVELING
Do not drive your vehicle when this light is on. The rear
of your vehicle is too low and part of the body or the
rear axle may be damaged when driving over bumpy
roads. When the light goes out, leveling is complete.
This procedure is automatic -- you don’thave to
do anything.
If the light comes on flashing, there may be a problem
with the leveling system.You should reduce your
vehicle speed andhave your vehicle serviced soon.
Brake Pad Wear Indicator Light
This light comes on when
the brake pads on your
vehicle have significantly
worn. The pads will have to
be replaced, so have your
vehicle serviced soon.
~6% NOTES
2-77
b
2-78
NOTES
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you'll find out how to operate the comfort control
and audio systems offered with your Catera.
Be sure to read about theparticular systems suppliedwith your vehcle.
3-2
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-9
3- 10
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation System
Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Optional Compact Disc Player
3-13
3-17
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
Bose" AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape
and Compact Disc Player
Trunk Mounted CD Changer
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your AudioSystem
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Heated Backlite Antenna
3-1
Comfort Controls
Driver’s Side TemperatureKnob
This section tells you how tomake your air system work
for you. Your comfort control system uses
ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.
You can control the heating, cooling and ventilation in
your Catera. Guidelines for using these systems are
found later in this section.
The driver’s side TEMP/AUTO knob adjusts the air
temperature coming through the system. Turn the
TEMP/AUTO knob clockwise to increase the
temperature and counterclockwise to decrease the
temperature. Pressing this knob puts the climate control
system in anautomatic mode. For more information, see
“Automatic Operation” later in this section.
Electronic Climate Control (ECC)
Passenger’s Side TemperatureKnob
I
f
I
The right front passenger cancontrol the temperature
of heated air for hisher own zone, independentfrom
the driver’s temperaturesetting. The passenger’s
temperature can beset anywhere between 60“F ( 16°C)
and 90°F (32°C).
To turn the system on, press the passenger’s side
TEMP/AUTO knob. Rotatethe knob clockwise to
increase temperature andcounterclockwise to decrease.
Pressing the knob again turns offthe dual-zone function
and returns the systemto the one-zone function, where
the driver controls the climate.
Fan Button
The button with thefan symbol adjusts the fan speed.
Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the down
arrow to decrease fan speed.
Outside Temperature Display
Automatic Operation
The outside temperature is always displayed when your
vehicle's ignition is on. If the outside temperature
display begins to flash, this means that icy road
conditions are possible. Adjust your driving if needed.
The display will flash for about30 seconds and then
remain on steady.
Pressing the driver's sideTEMP/AUTO knob sets the
system for automatic operation. Once the system is set,
sensors will control the air delivery mode. Air will come
from the floor, middle, side or windshield outlets. The
fan speed will vary asthe system maintains the selected
temperature setting. (All previous manually set mode
settings will change back to a fully automatic mode
when the climate control system is turned on this way.)
Mode Button
Press this button to deliver air through the floor, middle,
side or windshield outlets. The climate control system
will stay inthe selected ECC mode until the MODE
button is pressed again or until the TEMP/AUTO knob
is pressed. Press the up or down arrow to see the
available modes.
EnglisWetric Display
You can change the temperature display from English
(degrees Fahrenheit) to metric (degrees Celsius) by
pressing and holding the driver's sideTEMP/AUTO
knob for approximately three seconds. Repeat the
process to change back to English from metric.
Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensor
located in the middle of the instrument panel near the
windshield. This sensor is used by the automatic system
to regulate temperature.
To find your comfort zone, start with the 75O F (24"Cj
setting and allow about20 minutes for the system to
regulate. Adjust the temperature if necessary. If you
choose 60°F (16"C), the system will remainat that
maximum cooling setting and will notregulate fan
speed. If you choose the temperature of 90°F (32°C)'
the system will remain atthat maximum heating setting
and will notregulate fan speed. Choosing either
maximum setting will not cause the system to heat or
cool any faster.
3-3
In cold weather, when the system senses the need for
heat, airflow willbe directed out of the floor outlets. As
the interior temperature approaches a desired setting, the
blower speed will decrease. To maintain interior
comfort, the airflow may move to the instrument panel
air outlets and floor outlets (bi-level mode). On bright
sunny days in cold weather,
the airflow may come out of
the air conditioning outlets (AC mode) to maintain
comfort and preventstuffiness.
If your vehicle is sitting out on
a hot day and you have it
set for automatic operation, the
air will first flow outof the
floor air outlets during cool down. Thatis normal. This is
to expel hotair from theair outlets. As the air is cooled,
the airflow will move through the
air conditioning outlets.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system will
delay turning on the fan until warm air is available. The
length of delay depends on the outside
air temperature,
engine coolant temperatureor the time since the engine
was last started.As the coolant warms up, the blower
fan
speed will gradually increase andair will flow from the
heater outlets, with some airflow to the windshield to
prevent fogging under most normal conditions.
If you leave your vehicle, the system willremember the
control setting the next time you start your engine,
except for recirculation and defrost. Each ignitioncycle
cancels recirculation.
Manual Operation
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or
fan speed.
w.
'#HEATERDEFROST: This setting directs air to
the floor outlets and toward the windshield.
3
AC: This setting directs airflow through the middle
instrument panel outlets.
' ! ! BI-LEVEL: This setting directs air into your
vehicle in two ways. Coolair is directed to the upper
portion of your body throughthe middle instrument
panel outlets while warmedair is directed to the floor.
HEATER: This setting directs warmed air through
the floor outlets. Some warm air is diverted tothe
windshield to minimize fogging.
DEFROST: Press this button to quicklyremove
fog or frost from the windshield. This setting sends most
of the airflow to the windshield with onlya small
amount to the floor outlets.
*
FAN SPEEDS: Press the driver’s side
TEMP/AUTO knob to set the fan speed for automatic
operation. At this setting, the fan speed is automatically
controlled. If it iscold outside, the blower may not run
in the maximum high fan speed right away. The system
checks the temperature of the engine coolant to assure it
is warm enough to provide heat. When the engine
coolant iswarm, the controller allows the fan to
gradually increase to a higher speed. This prevents cold
air from blowing into the passenger compartment. If you
want the blower fan at a high speed, press the up arrow
button until you reach the highest position of the display.
If you want the blower fan at a low speed, press the
down arrow button until the lowest position is displayed.
ON/OFF: Press this button to turn the system off.
Press this button again to turn the system back on.
Turning the climatecontrol system on in this way
will recall all previous manually set mode settings.
If the system is turned on by pushing the driver’s
TEMP/AUTO knob for automatic operation, all of the
previous manually set mode settings will be changed
back to the fully automatic mode.
AC: Press this button to turn the air conditioning on and
off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air inside
the vehicle. In the automatic operation mode, the display
will show AC OFF when the air conditioning has been
turned off.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit the
amount of fresh air entering your vehicle. This ishelpful
when you are trying to cool the air quickly or limit odors
entering your vehicle. In the automatic operation mode,
the system will use recirculation as necessary to cool the
air. Pressing the recirculation button will change the
operation to a manual mode and the air will recirculate
non-stop. Press this button again to turn off the
recirculation feature.
If you notice the windows fogging, press the
recirculation button to exit the recirculation mode.
3-5
Air Conditioning
Heating
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.
Adjust the interior temperature to your comfort level
by turning either TEMP/AUTO knob clockwise to
increase temperature and counterclockwise to decrease
temperature. If the fan speed needs adjusting, press the
up or down arrow.
The climate control system will cool and dehumidify the
air inside the vehicle. While in the automatic operation
mode, the system will use recirculation as necessary to
cool the air. You may also need to adjust the interior
temperature. Turn either TEMP/AUTO knob clockwise
to increase the temperature and counterclockwise to
decrease temperature. Adjust the fan speed as needed.
In order to obtain the maximum cool setting, both the
driver’s and passenger’s TEMP/AUTO knobs must be
turned to 60°F (16°C).
3-6
Outside air will be brought in and sent through the floor
outlets. The heater works best if you keep the windows
closed while using it.
In order to obtain the maximum heat setting, both the
driver’s and passenger’s TEMFVAUTO knobs must be
turned to 90°F (32°C).
Ventilation System
The Catera’s ventilation system supplies outside air into
the vehicle when it is moving. Outside air will also enter
the vehicle when the heater or the air conditioning fan
is running.
I
The direction of airflow for the rear seats can also be
adjusted. Move the center control dial between each
vent up or down to adjust the airflow from lowto high.
Rotate the dial to the “0”position to stop airflow. Move
the lever in the center of each vent to direct airflow
toward the upperor floor outlets.
The front outlets are located in the center and at each
side of the instrument panel. You can adjust the
direction of airflow by moving the center control levers
or you can stop the airflow by moving the dial located
on each side of the outlets to the “0”position.
The airflow temperature from the rearoutlets is the
same as the driver’s temperature setting.
3-7
Ventilation Tips
0
Keep the hood andfront air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of the windows.
0
When you entera vehicle in cold weather, adjust the
fan to the highest speedfor afew moments before
driving off. This helps clear the intake outlets of
snow and moisture, andreduces the chance of
fogging theinside of the windows.
0
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps circulate air throughout
your vehicle.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
This ventilation system includes an air filter that helps to
remove dust, pollen, etc. from the air flowing into your
vehicle. A restriction in the airflowcoming into the
passenger compartment could be the result
of dirt
in the filter. For information about changing the
filter,
see “Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement” in
the Index. See the Maintenance Schedule booklet for
when to change the filter.
3-8
Defrosting
Use defrost to remove fog or ice from the windshield
quickly in extremely humidor cold conditions.
Press the defrost button on the control panel and adjust
the fan speed to the highest position.Make sure that the
side air vents are opened. Rotate both TEMP/AUTO
knobs clockwise as needed toadjust the temperature.
To warm the foot area while in defrost, press the
MODE button untilthe heateddefrost symbol appears
(see “Manual Operation” earlier in this section).
Note that recirculationis not available in the
defrost mode.
Rear Window Defogger
4
NOTICE:
The lines you see on the
rear window warm the
glass. With your vehicle’s
engine running, press this
button to turn on the rear
defogger.
Scraping the insideof your rear window could
cut and damage the heating grids.
Your warranty
would not cover this damage. And don’t put
to scrape themoff.
decals there; you might have
A
With it, the rear window and both outside rearview
mirrors are heated. The system will automatically shut
off after about 15 minutes. If further defogging is
desired, press the button again.
Do not attach a temporaryvehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
udio Systems
rour Catera audio system has beendesigned to operate
easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself
with it first. Find out what your Catera system can do
and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re
getting the most out of the advanced engineering that
went into it.
Setting the Clock
Press and hold HR or MN until the time display begins
to change. Release the button as you get close to the
correct time. The time may be set anytime the clock is
displayed. There is a two-second delaybefore the clock
goes into time-set mode.
3-9
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player
and Optional Compact Disc Player
I
DSPL: Press this buttonto display the station
being played.
IFinding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2
and preset stations.
SEEK-TUNE: Press and release this button to seek
to the next higheror lower radio station. Pressing and
holding this button until
a chime sounds puts the radio
in a tune mode. Inthis mode, higher or lower radio
stations are advancedto in small increments until the
SEEK-TUNE button is released. Tuning stops when
you release this button. If you press and hold the
SEEK-TUNE button again withinfive seconds of being
in the tune mode, tuning will continue. Waiting longer
than five seconds places the radio back in the seek mode.
For information onthe compact disc player, see "Trunk
Mounted CD Changer'' later in this section.
Playing the Radio
PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to release it from its
stored position. The system willturn on. Press the knob
again to turn the system off. To increase volume,turn the
knob clockwise.Turn it counterclockwise to decrease
volume. The volume level will appear
on the display.
3-10
SCAN: Press this button andSCAN will appearon the
display. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few
seconds. The radio will go to a station, stop for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Press this button
again to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM,six FM1 and six FM2).Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM,FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
Setting theTone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to
decrease bass.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until
you hear a chime. The sound will mute. When it
returns, release the button. Whenever you press that
numbered button, the station you set will return.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Adjusting theSpeakers
PRESET SCAN:Press and hold SCAN for two to three
seconds until PRESET SCAN appears on the display to
listen to each of your preset stations for afew seconds
(factory presets which have not beenreprogrammed
with your stations will be ignored). The radio will go
to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for afew seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press SCAN again to stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception, the radio will not stop at the
preset station.
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to adjust sound to the rightspeakers
and counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to adjust the sound to thefront speakers
and counterclockwise for therear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-11
Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will
begin playing as soon as it is inserted.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL,
BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio.
Other controls may have different functions when a tape
is inserted. The display will show TAPE with an arrow
to indicate which side of the tape is playing. PLAY will
appear on the display temporarily when a tape is
playing. The display will then revert back to showing
the time.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
could be that:
The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down and try turning the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Flip the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
cassette tape may be damaged and should not be
used in the player. Trya new tape to be sure your
player is working properly.
0
The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)
3-12
REV: Press the left arrow to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play while the tape reverses and REV will appear on the
display. You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to
another radio station while in REV mode.
FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another part
of the tape. Press it again to return to playing speed. The
radio will play whilethe tape advances and FF will
appear on the display. You may use your station
pushbuttons to tune to another radio station while in
FF mode.
SEEK-TUNE: Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection on the tape. Press the left arrow to search for
the previous selection on the tape (REP will appear on
the display). Your tape must have at least three seconds
of silence between each selection for SEEK-TUNE to
work. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button. SCAN FF will appear on the
display until the next selection is found and then SCAN
PLAY will appear on the display. Use SCAN to listen to
selections for a few seconds. The tape will go to a
selection, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next
selection. Press this button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tape
that is playing. (PLAY shows on the display.)
SOURCE: Press this button to switch from radio to
cassette tapeplay. If no cassette tape is in the tape
player, CASS appears on the display and then the radio
station appears briefly. The display then reverts back to
showing the time of day. Press this button again or
BAND to switch back to the radio.
Bose” AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape
and Compact Disc Player(If Equipped)
A EJECT Press the upward triangle button to
remove a tape. The radiowill play. Eject may be
activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off but they will notstart playing
until the PWR button is pressed. Press PWR or turn
the ignition key off to stop the cassette tape player. The
tape will stay in the player and resume play at the point
where it stopped. If you leave a cassette tape in the
player while listening to the radio, it may become warm.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage
For information on the compact disc player, see “Trunk
to the tapes and player. See “Careof Your Cassette Tape
Mounted CD Changer” later in this section.
Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and
hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator.
The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.
[email protected] Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
3-13
Playing the Radio
PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to releaseit from its
stored position. The system will turnon. Press the knob
again to turn the system off. To increase volume, turn
the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to
decrease volume. The volume level will appear on
the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button toselect AM, FM 1 or FM2
and preset stations.
SEEK-TUNE: Press and release this buttonto seek
to the next higheror lower radio station. Pressing and
holding this button untila chime sounds puts the radio
in a tune mode. In this mode, higher
or lower radio
stations are advanced toin small increments until the
SEEK-TUNE button is released. Tuning stops when
you release this button. Ifyou press and hold the
SEEK-TUNE button again within five secondsof being
in the tune mode, tuning will continue. Waiting longer
than five seconds places the radio back
in the seek mode.
SCAN: Press this button and SCAN willappear on the
display. Use SCANto listen to stations for a few
seconds. The radio will go to a station, stopfor a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Press this button
again to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttonslet
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, sixFM 1 and sixFM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FMl or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until
you hear achime. A preset number willappear on
the display. The sound will mute. Whenit returns,
release the button. Whenever you press that
numbered button, the stationyou set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
PRESET SCAN: Press and hold SCANfor two to three
seconds until PRESET SCAN appears on the display to
listen to each of your presetstations for a few seconds
(factory presets which havenot been reprogrammed
with your stations will beignored). The radio will go
to the first preset station storedon your pushbuttons,
stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press SCAN again to stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception,the radio will not stop at the
preset station.
Setting theTone
Playing a CassetteTape
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to
decrease bass.
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tapewill
begin playing as soon as it is inserted.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and
counterclockwise for the leftspeakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to adjust the sound to thefront speakers
and counterclockwise for therear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
While the tape isplaying, use the VOL, FADE, BAL,
BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio.
Other controls may have different functions when a tape
is inserted. The display will show TAPE with an arrow
to indicate which side of the tape is playing. PLAY will
appear on the display temporarily when a tape is
playing. The display will then revert back to showing
the time.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
could be that:
a The cassettetape is tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down and try turning the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Flip thetape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,your
cassette tapemay be damaged and should not be
used in the player. Try a new tape to be sure your
player is working properly.
a The cassette tape is
broken. (Check to see if your
tape isbroken. Try a new tape.)
3-15
REV: Press the left arrow toreverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play while the tapereverses and REV will appear onthe
display. You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to
another radio station while in REV mode.
FF: Press the right arrow tofast forward to another part
of the tape. Press it again to returnto playing speed. The
radio will play while the tape advances and FWD will
appear on the display.You may use your station
pushbuttons to tune toanother radio station while
in FF mode.
SEEK-TUNE: Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection on the tape.Press the left arrow to search for
the previous selection on the tape (REP will appear on
the display). Your tape must have at least three seconds
of silence between each selection for SEEK-TUNE to
work. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button.SCAN will appear on the
display until the next selection is
found and then PLAY
will appear on the display. Use SCAN to listen to
selections for a few seconds. The tape will go to a
selection, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press this button again tostop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tape
that is playing. (PLAY shows on the display.)
SOURCE: Press this buttonto switch from radio to
cassette tape play. If no cassette tape is in the tape
player, CASS appears on the display and thenthe radio
station appears briefly. The display then reverts back to
showing the time of day. Pressthis button again or
BAND to switch back to
the radio.
e EJECT Press the upward triangle button to
remove a tape. The radio will play. Eject may be
activated with the radiooff. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off but they will start
not playing
until the PWR button is pressed. Press PWRor turn the
ignition key off to stop the cassette tape player. The tape
will stay in the player
and resume play at the point
where it stopped. If you leave a cassette tape inthe
player while listening tothe radio, it may become warm.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes,but
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player.See “Care of Your Cassette Tape
Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and
hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator.
The radio will display--- to show the indicator was reset.
[email protected] Reductionis manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarksof
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Trunk Mounted CD Changer (Option)
With the compact disc changer, you can play up to
12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may be played
using the trays supplied in the magazine. The small discs
(8 cm) can be played only with specially designed trays.
You must first load the magazine with discs before you
can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds one
disc. Press the button on the back of the magazine and
pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from
bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label side down.
If you load a disc label side up, the disc will not play
and an error will occur. Gently pushthe tray back into
the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loading up
to 12 discs in the magazine.
Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide
open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push
the magazine into the changer in the direction of the
arrow marked on top of the magazine.
3-17
~~~~~~
~
~~
~
~~~
~~
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD
changer door all the way open. The magazine will
automatically eject. Remember to keep the door closed
whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting
inside the changer.
Whenever a CDmagazine with discs is loaded in the
changer, the CD symbol will appear on the radio display.
If the CDchanger is checking the magazine for CDs, the
CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is
ready to play. When aCD begins playing, a disc and
track number will be displayed. The disc numbers are
listed on the front of the magazine.
All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio
buttons, except for ejecting the CD magazine.
Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. If the
door is left partially open, the changer will notoperate
and an error will occur. When the door is closed, the
changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine.
This will continue for up to oneand a half minutes,
depending on the number of discs loaded.
PUSHBUTTONS: Press buttons one through six to go
from one compact disc to another that is loaded in the
changer. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until
a beep sounds to use pushbuttons 7 through 12. These
pushbuttons represent the order of the discs loaded in
the changer.
DSPL: Press and hold this button to see the track
elapsed time (available on all radios). Press DSPL again
within five seconds to see how many compact discs are
loaded in the changer and where they are loaded (not
available on the standard AM-FM Stereo radio).
REV: Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection.
FF: Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection.
SEEK-TUNE: Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection. Press the left arrow to search for the previous
track selection. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: When you press SCAN while playing a CD, you
will hear the first few seconds of each track on a disc.
Press SCAN again to stop on a CD. The CD will mute
while scanning and SCAN will appear on the display.
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RDM will appear on the
display. Press SEEK-TUNE while RDM is on the
display to randomly seek through discs and tracks. Press
RDM again to turn off random play. (This button is not
available on the standard AM-FM Stereo radio.)
SIDE: Press this button to select the next disc in
the changer. Each time you press this button, DISC
LOADING will appear on the display (does not appear
on the standard AM-FM Stereo radio) and the disc
number on the radio display will move to the next
available CD.
SOURCE: Press this button if you have a disc loaded in
the changer and the radio is on, to play a compact disc.
To return to playing the radio, press BAND. Pressing
SOURCE also switches between a tape or compact disc
if both are loaded.
EJECT: Slide the CD changer door all the way open
and the disc holder will automatically eject.
Compact Disc Changer Errors
If ERR or ERROR appears on the display, an error has
occurred and the compact disc temporarily cannot play.
CD CHANGER ERRORcould be displayed for
the following:
The road is too rough. The disc should play when the
road is smoother.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or loaded label
side up.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
3-19
CHEK DOOR or CD CHANGER DOOR OPENis
displayed when the CD changer door isleft open.
Completely close the changer door to restore
normal operation.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
CD CHANGER NO DISCS is displayed when an empty
magazine is inserted in the CD changer. Try the
magazine again witha disc loaded on one of the trays.
(This message does notappear in thedisplay on the
standard AM-FM Stereo radios.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be
corrected, please contact your dealer.If your radio
displays an error number, writeit down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Your Catera has a “built-in” theft-deterrent feature on
each radio that is automatic -- there is no programming
required. The radio in yourCatera cannot be used in
any other vehicle besidesanother Catera if it were to
be removed.
3-20
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include thefollowing:
+: Pressing this buttonincreases volume.
-:Pressing this buttondecreases volume.
o (SOURCE): To change to a tape or CD, press
this button.
:Press this button to move forward through preset
radio stations or to the next selection on a tape or CD.
4 :Press this button to move rearward through preset
radio stations or to the previous selection on a tape
or CD.
f (BAND): Press this button to change between AM,
FM1 or FM2 for the radio. This button also changes a
tape to the other side, restarts a CD if playing a single
CD orgoes to the next available CD loaded inthe trunk
mounted CD changer.
Understanding Radio Reception
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
AM
The range formost AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noiseis almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful toyour hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
3-21
~~~
~~~
~
~~
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add
what you want. If you can,it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operationof your vehicle’s
engine, Catera radio or other systems, and even
damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, checkwith
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobileradio and telephone units.
3-22
-~
~~
~
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
NOTICE:
--
~~
--
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can
cause
reduced sound quality, ruinedcassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes shouldbe stored intheir.
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN or
CLEAN TAPE toindicate that you have used your tape
player for 50 hours withoutresetting the tape clean
timer. Each time thecassette is cleaned, the 50 hour
cassette timer should be reset.This is done by holding
down the eject button for three seconds until theTAPE
CLEAN message is displayed. If you notice a reduction
in sound quality, trya known good cassette to see if
it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other
cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the
tape player.
ueanlng may be done with a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as thehubs of the cleaner cassetteturn.
It is normal for the cassetteto eject while cleaning.
Insert the cassetteat least six times to ensure
thorough cleaning.
Some cleaning cassettes or CD adapter kits may appear
as a broken tape. If the cleaning cassette is ejected
immediately from the tape player, follow these steps for
the TAPE CLEAN OVERRIDE feature:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the SOURCEbutton for three
seconds. After three seconds, the tape icon will flash
indicating the cut tape feature is now turned off.
4. Turn the radio on and insert thecleaning cassette (or
the CDadapter kit).
5. Eject thetape after thetape player has been cleaned.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject and, itmay not clean as thoroughly as the
scrubbing type cleaner.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is ingood condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the broken
tape detection feature is activeagain.
3-23
Heated Backlite Antenna
Your AM-FM antenna is integrated with your rear
window defogger,into your rear window.Be sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not
scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere
with radio reception.
Do not try to clearfrost orother material from the
inside of the rear window with anice scraper, credit
card or other hard object. This may damage the rear
defogger grid and affect your radio’s abilityto pick up
stations clearly.
3-24
If, when you turn on yourrear window defogger, you
hear static on your radio station, it means a defogger
grid line has beendamaged and must berepaired.
(Your radio is not at fault.)
If you choose to adda cellular telephone to your Catera,
and the antenna needs to be attached to theglass, be
sure that you do notdamage the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna.
fi
NOTES
3-25
kb
3-26
NOTES
&
NOTES
.. .
&I
3-28
NOTES
:
/
f
=a
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4- 10
4- 12
4- 13
4- 14
4-15
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
4- 17
4-20
4-2 1
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-30
4-32
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
4-1
L
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
Catera: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts’’ in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
4-2
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solvethis highway safety problem
is forpeople never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
what if people do? How much is “too much” if the
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Drunken Driving
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
0
Vision
0
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are theresult of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, some 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state todrink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The amount of alcohol consumed
0
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg)person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in anhour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or threemixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
Since alcohol is carried in body water,this means that a
woman generally will reacha higher BAC level thana
man ofher same body weight wheneach has the same
number ofdrinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growingnumber of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will beover 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (inone hour). Of course,as we’ve seen, it
depends on how muchalcohol is inthe drinks, and how
quickly the person drinksthem.
But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC
of 0.10 percent. Researchshows that the driving skills
of many peopleare impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All
It’s the amount of alcoholthat counts. For example, if
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
the same person drank threedouble martinis (3 ounces
Statistics show that thechance of beingin a collision
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
BAC wouldbe close to 0.12 percent. A person who
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
of
consumes food just before or during drinking will have
0.06 percent has doubledhis orher chance of having a
a somewhat lower BAClevel.
collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
this driver having a collisionis 12times greater; at a
a lower relative percentageof body water than men.
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink.No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to reactquickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
A CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even asmall amount
of alcohol. Youcan have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink anddrive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
--
--
4-5
.
~
-
-
~~
=
~~~
~~~
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.But
that’s only an average. It might be lesswith one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph ( 100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy bralung. If you keeppace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
--
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stopand the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABSis an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin todrive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you may even notice that your brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
ABS
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
4-7
The anti-lock system canchange the brake pressure
faster than any driver could.The computer is
programmed to make themost of availablc tire and
road conditions.
Here's how anti-lock works.Let's say the road is wet.
You're driving safely.Suddenly an animaljumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here's what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheelsare slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes ateach front wheel and at the
rear wheels.
You can steer around the obstacle while bralung hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though youhave
anti-lock brakes.
This warning light will
come on to letyou know if
there’s a problem with your
traction control system.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear the
anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the brake
pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Traction Control System
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one
or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning to
lose traction. When this happens, the system reduces
engine power to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you canturn the
traction control system off if youever need to. (You
should turn the system offif your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
To turn the system off, press
the TCS OFF button located
next to the radio on the
center console.
b
Speed Sensitive Steering(SSS)
This system varies the amountof steering effort
proportionate to your vehicle speed. Steering is
easier at a
lower speed for maneuvering and parking ease.
As your
vehicle speed increases, the steeringeffort also increases.
At highway speeds, the amount of steeringeffort is
increased to provide manual-like steering for maximum
control and stability.If your Catera seems harder to steer
than normal when parking or driving slow, something
may be wrong with the speed sensitive steeringsystem.
You will still have power steering, however, steering will
be stiffer than normalat low speeds.
Braking in Emergencies
Steering Tips
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
Driving on Curves
time. In many emergencies,steering can help you more
than even the very best
braking.
It’s important to take curves ata reasonable speed.
Steering
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Power Steering
Experienced driver or beginner, eachof us is subject to
the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The
traction of the tires againstthe road surface makesit
possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wetice, you’ll understand this.
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
4-10
The traction you can get ina curve dependson the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through
a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems-- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden accelerationcan demand too
much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to
“Traction Control System” in the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in frontof you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your Catera can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies’’ earlier in this section.)It is better to
remove as much speed as you canfrom a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
If you need toreduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometime that your right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulderis only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the
accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steerso
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter
turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your
steering wheel to go straight downthe roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for justthe right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, ora brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passingdriver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubtwhatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicatea
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never crossa solid
line on your sideof the lane ora double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’thave adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slowsor stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens tocause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
4-13
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before movingout
of the right lane to pass. When youare farenough
ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move backinto the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
0
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
0
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
0
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can easea little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review whatdriving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t haveenough friction where the
tires meet the roadto do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver
can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existingconditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your Catera’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the accelerationskid.
4-14
-
If your traction control system is off, then an
acceleration skid is alsobest handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe
vehicle to go.If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It isimportant to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-15
Here are some tips on night driving,
0
Drive defensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
0
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much roadahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
4-16
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second’or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirtyglass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Driving in Rain and onWet Roads
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it's easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as yourheadlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren't even awareof it.
Rain and wet roadscan mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can't stop, accelerate or turn as well because
4-17
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to goslower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
4-18
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, tryto slow down before you hit them.
A LAUTION:
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually rideon the water.
This can happen if the road is wetenough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
more is low. Itcan happen if a lot of water is standing on
your brakes work normally.
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard andfast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it israining.
4-19
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
City Driving
NOTICE:
If you drive too quicklythrough deep puddlesor
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Neverdrive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0
0
Besides slowing down, allowsome extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself moreclear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires withproper tread depth. (See
“Tires” inthe Index.)
4-20
One of the biggest problems with city streets
is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watchout for
what the otherdrivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
0
Freeway Driving
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just asyou would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to
move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light,
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-21
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep tothe right. Drive at the same
speed most of theother drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treatthe
left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors andglance over your shoulder asoften as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly withthe traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway,adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before youleave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
4-22
Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want toleave the freeway, moveto the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving ona Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try
to be well rested.If you
must start when you’re notfresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t planto make too many miles thatfirst part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Catera dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
0
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades:Are they in good shape?
0
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
0
Lumps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
0
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
0
0
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually sucha condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleepat the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’tlet it
happen to you!If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
0
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, hereare some tips that can make
your trips safer and moreenjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, coolingsystem and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this:let your engine dosome of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
I A CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-24
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well.
You would
or even none going
then have poor braking
down a hill.You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Winter Driving
Coasting downhillin NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get
so hot that they wouldn't workwell. You would
then have poor braking or even none going down
a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine
running and your vehicle in gear when you
go downhill.
0
0
0
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lanewhen driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don't swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
Here are some tips for winter driving:
you stay inyour own lane.
As you go over the topof a hill, bealert. There could be 0 Have your Catera in good shape for winter.
something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your
trunk.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warnof
special problems. Examplesare long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks areaor winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-25
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires
meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less tractionor “grip” and will need tobe
very careful.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Besure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
4-26
--
....... ..
-
.,.,..
..
-4
i
What’s the worst time for this?“Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick andhard to drive on.But wet
ice canbe even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32°F; 0”C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Keep your traction control system on. It improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though your vehicle has a traction control system,
you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. See “Traction Control System” in the
Index. Also, see “Third Gear Start” in the Index.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered withice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not tobrake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-27
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
’
If you are stopped by heavy snow, youcould be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless youknow for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-28
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
A CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle.
This can cause deadlyCO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside.CO could overcome youand kill
you. You can’t seeit orsmell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snowfrom
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the sideof the
vehicle that’s awayfrom the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go .a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel forthe heat that you get andit keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for awhile.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you canget
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
4-29
Loading Your Vehicle
(@I
I
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
OCCUPANTS
VEHICLE CAP. WT.
FRT. CTR. RR.
TOTAL LBS.
KG
MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
CAPACITY WEIGHT
XXX
COLD
TIRE
TIRE SIZE
SPEED
PRESSURE
RTG
PSUKPa
FRT.
RR.
SPA.
IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1/28KPa
SEE OWNER‘S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight
it
may properly carry.The Tire-Loading Information label
found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the
proper size, speed rating andrecommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you
important information about the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and
the total weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight
and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all
options not installed at the factory.
4-30
f
\
MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP
DATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR RR
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
I
The other label is the certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle WeightRating). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle,or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
for either the front
or rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spreadit out.
Don’t carry more than 176 lbs. (80 kg) in the trunk.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do,parts on your vehicle can
break, or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These couldcause you to lose control.
Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injurepeople ina sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, putthem as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When you carry something insidethe
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unlessyou
need to.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages or anything else -- they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-31
Electronic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the
load changes. It’s automatic -- you don’t need to
adjust anything.
Towing a Trailer
If you don’t usethe correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when youpull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,the
brakes may not work well or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously
injured.
Pull atrailer only if you have followed all the
steps in this section. Askyour Catera dealer for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
--
4-32
I NOTICE:
Pulling atrailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costlyrepairs not coveredby
your warranty. To pull atrailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your Catera
dealer for important information about towing a
trailer with your vehicle.
Your Catera can tow a trailer if it isequipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it aremany
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as theengine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to
work harder against the drag of the added weight. The
engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds
and under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s
more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
0
Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
0
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle orother parts could be damaged.
0
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km)that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
0
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 kmh)) to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
0
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-33
Weight of the Trailer
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is animportant
weight to measure because it affects the total capacity
weight of your vehicle. The capacity weight includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who willbe riding in the vehicle.. And
if you will tow atrailer, you must subtract the tongue
load from your vehicle’s capacity weight because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” inthe Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximumload capacity.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (454 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
30009 Van Dyke
P.O. Box 9025
Warren, MI 48090-9025
In Canada, write to:
ueneral Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-34
A
B
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Hitches
It’s important to have thecorrect hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label at therear edge of
the driver’s door or see “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the
GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of
the trailer tongue.
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt
and water can, too.
4-35
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, don’t try to
tap into the hydraulic brake system. If you do, both
brake systems won’t work well, or atall.
trailer. Andalways keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Be sureto read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would whendriving your vehicle without a trailer.This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out forthe open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking withthe added weight of the
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And,because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
4-36
Backing Up
lbrn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, justmove that hand
to the left.To move thetrailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your Catera dealer. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn
or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps
will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even ifthe bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
1
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailerto come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot andno longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) orless to reduce the
possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
4-37
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your
vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, yourrig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
But ifyou ever have to park yourrig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold thepedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
1. Apply the regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P).
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then shift into
PARK (P) firmly and applythe parking brake.
5. Release the regular brakes.
3. Drive slowly until thetrailer is clear of the chocks.
Your vehicle will needservice more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedulefor more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system
and brakeadjustment. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index willhelp you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good ideato review these
sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-38
NOTES
4-39
NOTES
4-40
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-8
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Catera
5- 14
5-22
5-23
5-33
Engine Overheating
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice orSnow
5-1
Pressing this button on the
center console makes the
front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. The
indicator light on the button
also flashes. Pressing the
button again turns the
flashers off. The flashers
work regardless of the
key position.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals won’t work since they are already flashing.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warnothers. They
also let police know youhave a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
5-2
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set oneup at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If the battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
Catera. Please follow.the steps below to do it safely.
I NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps couldresult in costlydamage
to your vehiclethat wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
Trying tostart your Catera by pushing or pulling
it won’t work and itcould damage your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gasthat can explodeor ignite.
They contain enough electricityto burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all
of these thingscan hurt you.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
I NOTICE:
If the other system isn’ta 12-volt system with
a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
-~
--
5-3
2. Get the vehiclesclose enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t beable to
start your Catera and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter. Turnoff all lamps that aren’t needed as well
as the radios. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. Inaddition, it could save theradio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. On the Catera.
you’ll also need to open the “use box cover to
access the positive(+) terminal on the battery.
’ A CAUTION:
I
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-4
5 . Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could also be damaged.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.You
don’t need to addwater to the Delco [email protected]
battery installed in everynew GM vehicle. But
if a battery hasfiller caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there.If it is low,add water to
take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acidthat can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally getit in
your eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with
water and get medical help immediately.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know.Positive (+) will go to
positive and negative (-) will go to an unpainted
metal engine part or a body metal surface. Don’t
connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will get
a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts, too. Also, don’tconnect negative (-) to
negative (-).
A CAU JON:
Fans or othermoving engineparts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engines are running.
5-5
7. Don’t let the other end
of the positivecable
touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+)
terminal of the
good battery.
6 . Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery.
5-6
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery, but not nearengine parts
that move.
A good spot toattach the
negative (-) cable is on
the bracket between the
Don’t let the other end of the negative (-) cable touch
anything until the next step. The other end of the
negative (-) cable doesn ’t go to the dead battery.It goes
to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of the
vehicle with the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle withthe good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it
won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
5-7
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Takecare that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
I - +I
B
1
Towing Your Catera
Try to havea Catera dealer or a professional towing
service tow your Catera. See “Roadside Service” in
the Index.
If your vehicle has been changed
or modified sinceit
was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog
lamps, aero skirting or special tires and wheels, these
instructions may not becorrect.
Before you do anything, turnon thehazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive.
e The make, model and year of your vehicle.
e Whether you can still move the shift lever.
e If there was an accident, what was damaged.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator
know that this manual contains towinginstructions and
illustrations. The operator may want to see them.
Never get under your vehicle after ithas
been lifted bythe tow truck.
Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chainswhen towing it.
Use only R-hooks.
Front and RearTowing
-
I k!,CAUTION:
To help avoidinjury to you or others:
Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster thansafe or posted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
CAUTION: (Continued)
A
CAUTION:
A vehicle can fall from a car-carrier if it isn’t
adequately secured.This can causea collision,
serious personal injury andvehicle damage.
The vehicle should be tightly secured with
chains
or steel cables beforeit is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.)that can be cut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use
R-hooks inserted in the front and rearR-hook
slots. Never use J-hooks. They will damage
drivetrain andsuspension components.
5-9
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key
turned to the OFF position. The steering wheel should
be clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping
device designed for towing service. Do not use the
vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transmission
should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking
brake released.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drive wheels.
Front Towing
5-10
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling type
or wheel-lift
equipment or fascidfog lamp damage may occur.
Use car-carrier equipment only. Additional
ramping may berequired for car-carrier
equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps.
Do not attach winch cables, T-hooksor J-hooks
to suspension componentswhen usingcar-carrier
equipment. Always use R-hooks inserted into
the R-hook slots.
I
Attach R-hook chains on both sides, in the slotted holes
in the bottom of the frame rails, behind the front wheels.
These slots are to be used whenloading and securing to
car-carrier equipment.
Attach a separate safety chain aroundthe outboard end
of each lower control arm.
5-11
Rear Towing
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling type
or wheel-lift
equipment or rearbumper valance damage
may occur. Usecar-carrier equipment only.
Additional ramping may be required for
carcarrier equipment. Use safety chainsand
wheel straps.
Do not attach winch cables, T-hooksor J-hooks
to suspension componentswhen usingcar-carrier
equipment. Always useR-hooks inserted in the
R-hook slots.
5-12
Attach R-hook chains to theR-hook slots in the frame
rails just ahead of the rear wheels on both sides.
These slots are to be used when loading and securing to
car-carrier equipment.
Attach a separate safety chain around the bumper energy
absorbing shockhnit on the left side of the vehicle and
another safety chain on the right side tow hook.
Engine Overheating
You will find the warning light abouta hot engine on the
instrument panel.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
1.
4 CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you
badly, evenif you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil
there is no signof steam or coolant beforeyou
open the hood.
If you keepdriving when your engineis
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badlyburned. Stop your engineif
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
I NOTICE:
If your engine catchesfire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be
badly damaged. The costlyrepairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-14
If No Steam Is ComingFrom Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
0
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
0
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. Turn off your air conditioner.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for two or three minutes while you’re parked, to see
if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the
warning, turn ofSthe engine and get everyone out
of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
2. Dial temperature control to the highest heat setting
and open the window, as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D) orTHIRD (3).
5-15
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
An electric fan under the hood can
start up even
when the engine is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Fans
I A C UTION:
A
Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine
If you
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could loseall coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could beburned.
Get any leak fixed before you
drive the vehicle.
The coolant level should be ator slightly above the
KALTKOLD line (seam).
If it isn’t, you mayhave a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pumpor somewhere else in
the cooling system.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered
by your warranty.
If there seems to beno leak, with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine fans are running. If the engine
is overheating, both fans should be running. If they
aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
5-17
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the
coolant level
isn’t at the KALT/COLD line (seam), add a 50/50
mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and
[email protected] at the coolant surge tank, butbe
sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is coolbefore you do it. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Indexfor more information.)
Steam and scalding liquids froma hot cooling
system can blowout and burnyou badly. They
are underpressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap even a little they
can comeout at high speed. Neverturn the
cap when the cooling system, includingthe
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling systemand coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn
the pressure cap.
--
5-18
--
I NOTICE:
Adding onlyplain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol,can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system isset for the proper coolant mix. With
plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could
get toohot but you wouldn’t getthe overheat
warning. Your engine couldcatch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and [email protected] coolant.
In cold weather,water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. So
use the recommended coolant.
A CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and itwill burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on
a hot engine.
5-19
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don't press
down while turning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-20
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mix,
up to the KALTKOLD line(seam).
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you can feel theupper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mix to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the KALTKOLD line (seam).
5-21
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire
to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintainyour tires properly.If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likelyto leak out slowly.
But if you shouldever have a “blowout,” hereare a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward thatside. Take yourfoot off the
accelerator pedal andgrip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gentlybrake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is tight.
A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts muchlike a
skid and may require the
same correction you’d use in a
skid. In anyrear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle undercontrol by
steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may
be
very bumpy and noisy,but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next partshows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-22
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
Changing atire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over youor other
injured.
people. You and they could be badly
Find a level placeto change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Put the shift lever inPARK (P).
2. Set the parking brakefirmly.
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even morecertain the vehicle won't move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthestaway from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
....__.....
.._........
.......*.....
1.
The following steps will tell you howto use the jack and
change a tire.
5-23
Removing the Spare Tire andTools
Unbuckle the tire and lift it up to remove itfrom the trunk.
The equipment you'll need is in the trunk. On the
driver's side of the trunk is the spare tire. Pull the
fasteners on the spare tire cover to access the tire.
5-24
The jack and tool kit
are located on the
passenger's side of the
trunk. Pull the red handle to
remove the cover and access
the equipment.
Turn the nut holding thejack counterclockwise and
remove it.
5-25
Removing the Wheel Cover
The tools you'll be using include the jack (A), the wheel
wrench (B) and the screwdriver ( C ) .
Seven-Spoke Wheel
There is a center wheel cover on all of the available
wheels (five-spoke wheel notshown). Using the flat end
of the screwdriver, gentlypry the wheel cover off. Be
careful not to scratch the wheeledge and don't try to
remove it with your hands.
5-26
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack lift
head a few inches.
Seven-Spoke Wheel
1 . If you have the seven-spoke wheel, using the wheel
wrench, loosen all of the wheel bolts. Don’t remove
them yet.
If you have the five-spoke wheel (not shown), use
the flat end of the screwdriver to pry off the five
black plastic wheel boltcaps. Then, using the wheel
wrench, loosen all of the wheel bolts. Don’t remove
them yet.
3. To access the jack hoisting notches, slide the cover
out (located either in front of or behind the tire you
are changing).
5-27
Getting under a vehicle whenit is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badlyinjured or killed. Never getunder
a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.
cm
(22 inches)
cm
(21.3 inches)
NOTICE:
Position the jack under the vehicle (as shown in 4)
step
and raise thejack lift head until it’s firmly set into the
hoisting notch on the vehicle’s fiame, nearest the
flat tire.
5-28
Raising your vehicle withthe jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid apersonal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift headinto the proper location beforeraising
the vehicle.
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
A CAUTION:
I
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jackhandle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
5. Remove allwheel bolts and take off the flattire.
Rust or dirton thewheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make
the wheel bolts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirtfrom the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can usea cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to,to get all therust or
dirt off.
5-29
A CAUTION:
r
Never use oil or grease on wheel bolts.you
If do,
the bolts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall
off, causing a serious accident.
7. Replace the wheel
bolts. Tighten each
bolt by hand until
the wheel is held
against the hub.
8. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-30
9. Tighten the wheel
bolts firmly in a
criss-cross
sequence as shown.
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel bolts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
bolts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
1A CAUTION:
I
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
wheel boltscan cause the wheel to become loose
and even comeoff. This could leadto an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel bolts. If you have
to replace them, besure to get newGM original
equipment wheel bolts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the
bolts tightened with a torque wrench to 80 lb-ft
(110 Nam).
5-31
RIGHT SIDEOF TRUNK:
A
Storing a jack,a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
After you’ve put thespare tire on yourvehicle, you’ll
need to store the flat tire in the trunk.Use the following
procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk.
I
LEFT SIDE OF TRUNK:
5-32
I
Put the flat tire in the trunk
where the spare is stored
(driver’s side wheel well).
Secure the flat tire with the
straps that are used to hold
the spare in place.
JACK
/
The jackingtools are stored on the passenger’s side of
the trunk behind the panel with the red pull handle.
Make sure these tools are properly secured when
not in use.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
NOTICE:
What you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is
to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
-
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth,you can destroy your transmission.
I
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in theIndex.
L
If you let your tires spin at hig: ;peed, they can
explode, and you or others could beinjured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could causean engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right.That will
clear the area around your front wheels. You should turn
your traction control system off. (See “Traction Control
System” in the Index.) Then shift back and forth
between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t
get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed
out. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Catera” in the Index.
5-33
fi
5-34
NOTES
&
NOTES
.
5-35
b%
5-36
NOTES
Here you will find information about the careof your Catera. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-7
6- 10
6- 15
6-18
6- 19
6-24
6-25
6-29
6-29
6-37
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Engine Coolant
Windshield WasherFluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Wiper Blade Replacement
6-38
6-46
6-49
6-50
6-5 1
6-53
6-54
6-55
6-55
6-62
6-62
6-63
6-63
Tires
Cleaning the Inside of Your Catera
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Catera
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Wheels
Underbody Maintenance
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
6-1
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your Catera dealer knows your vehicle best andwants
you to be happy with it.We hope you’ll go to your
dealer for allyour service needs. You’llget genuine GM
parts and GM-trained and supportedservice people.
If you wantto do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to get the proper Catera Service Manual. It tells
you much more about howto service your Catera than
this manual can.To order the proper service manual,see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
n
w
6-2
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Catera” in the Index.
You should keep a record withall parts receipts and
list the mileage andthe date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Maintenance
Schedule booklet.
Fuel
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the properreplacement parts
and tools beforeyou attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and (‘metric”
fasteners can be easily confused.If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could behurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91octane or
higher for best performance. You may use middlegrade
or regular unleaded gasolines, but your vehicle may not
accelerate as well.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet
specifications ASTM D4814 in the United States
and CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved gasoline
specifications have been developed by the American
Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for
better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specificationcould
provide improved driveability and emission control
system protection compared to other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least
91 (at least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular).
If the octane is 1ess.than 87, you may get a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough,
it can damage your engine.
Things you might add to the outsideof your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your Cateradealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
6-3
If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane
or higher and youstill hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little
pinging noise whenyou’re accelerating or driving up a
hill. That’s normal, and you don’t
have to buy a higher
octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant
knock that means you havea problem.
vehicleis certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If such fuels arenot available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle
may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your
authorized Cateradealer for diagnosis to determine the
cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
IT your
Some gasolines that are not reformulatedfor low
emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadlenyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask your service station operator whether or not this fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does notrecommend the
use of such gasolines. Iffuels containing MMT are used,
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission
control system performance may be affected.
The
malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
Catera dealer for service.
To provide cleaner air, allgasolines in the UnitedStates
are now required tocontain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in yourengine and
fuel system, allowing your emissioncontrol system to
function properly.Therefore, you should not haveto
add anything to thefuel. In addition, gasolines
containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may beavailable in yourarea to
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use thesegasolines if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
becoveredunderyourwarranty.
.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States orCanada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuelavailability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors International Product Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
The cap is behind a hinged door on the passenger’s side
of your vehicle.
I A CAUTION:
I
1
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don't smoke if you're near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
To use this feature,
your vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press the fuel
door unlock button located
on the.instrumentpanel
center console to unlock and
open the fueldoor. You can
also press the fuel button on
the RKE transmitter to
access the fuel cap.
While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap inside the
fuel door as shownby the arrow.
To take off the cap, turn it slowly to theleft
(counterclockwise).
Checking Things Under the Hood
If you get gasoline on yourself
and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on youif you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly.This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Catera” in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap.
A CAC-ION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even whenthe engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Things that burncan get onhot engine parts and
start a fire. Theseinclude liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant,brake fluid, windshield washerand
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop orspill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-7
Hood Release
Pull the lever inside the
vehicle to open the hood. It
is located on the lower left
side of theinstrument panel.
,
I
.,
Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release whichis located above the front
grille. Lift upon the release lever asyou raise the hood.
When you open the hood, you’ll see:
1
H
A. Coolant Fill Location
B. Air Cleaner
C. Passenger’s Compartment
Air Filter
D. Engine Oil Fill Location
E. Engine Oil Dipstick Location
F. Windshield Washer Fluid
G. Brake Master Cylinder
H. Power Steering Fluid
I. Battery
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Then pullthe hood down and close it firmly.
6-9
Engine Oil
If the lowoil level light on
the instrument panelcomes
on, it means you needto
check yourengine oil level
right away. Formore
information, see “Low Oil
Level Light” in the Index.
You should check your
engine oil level regularly;
this is an added reminder.
It’s a goodidea to check your engine oil everytime you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
6-10
The engine oil dipstick is
located behind the radiator
hose on the driver’s side
of the engine.The yellow
looped handle helps to
identify it.
Turn off theengine and give the oil a few minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, theoil dipstick
might not show theactual level.
Checking Engine Oil
Pull outthe dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.
If your engine hasso
much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
The oil fill cap is located
behind the engine oil
dipstick and next to the
engine block on the driver’s
side of the engine. Turn the
cap counterclockwise to
remove it.
When to Add Oil
If the oil is at or
below the MIN mark, then you’ll
need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use
the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil touse.
For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and
Specifications” in the Index.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
What Kind of Oil to Use
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
~
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified
by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carrythis Starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.If
you have your oil changed
for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is
American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
HOT
WEATHER
7
~
“F
“C
I100 -
+ 38
+ 80 -
+ 27
+60 -
+ 16
+40-
+4
+ 20 -
-7
0-
---’I
- 18
1-91
sa
PI
-
You should also usethe proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shownin the following chart:
r
abow 0°F
(-18°C)
SAE 5w-30
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50OR AMY
OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
As shown in the chart,SAE low-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W-30 if it’s going
to be colder than 60°F ( 16”C) before your next oil
change. When it’s very cold, you should use SAE
5W-30. These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils,
such as SAE 2OW-50.
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not coveredby your warranty.
GM [email protected] meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20°F (-29”C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil oran SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your Catera dealer is
ready to advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is truefor you, use the shorttripkity
maintenance schedule:
0
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
0
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
0
Most trips are through dusty areas.
0
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your Catera.
0
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
6-13
Driving under theseconditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner.If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 5,000 miles (8 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first. (See “Check Oil Light” in the Index.)
If none of themis true, use the long triphighway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter at the
first 5,000 miles (8 000 km)or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first. Then, change the oil and filter every
10,000 miles ( 16 000 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highwayconditions causes engine oil
to break down slower.(See “Check Oil Light” in
the Index.)
6-14
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that usedengine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthyfor your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let usedoil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with
soap and
water, or agood hand cleaner. Washor properly throw
away clothing or rags containing usedengine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings aboutthe use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can bea real threat to the environment.If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into
sewers, or into streamsor bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properlydisposing of your usedoil,
ask your dealer,a service station or alocal recycling
center for help.
Air Cleaner
I
L
1. Unhook the five clips that attach the air cleaner lid to
the housing.
The air cleaneris located behind the headlamps on the
passenger’s side of the engine. Be sure the engine has
cooled before following these stepsto replace the air filter.
2. Loosen the retaining clamp on the air intake tube
and then disconnect the tube (as shown by the
arrow above).
3. Move the hose going to the coolant surge tank out
of the way so the air cleaner lid can be lifted.
6-15
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet.
‘A
CAUTION:
Operating the engine withthe air cleaner off can
cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleansthe air, it stops flames if the
engine backfires.If it isn’t there, and the engine
backfires, you could beburned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working onthe engine with
the air cleaner off.
4. Lift the lid, take out the air filter and remove any
loose debris that may be found laying in the air
cleaner base.
5. Install a new air filter element. See “Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index.
To reinstall the air cleaner assembly, replace the air
cleaner lid, reattach the five clips, replace the air intake
tube and tighten theclamp. Return the coolant surge
tank hose to its proper position.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whento
replace the air filter.
6-16
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a
damaging engine fire. And,dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damageit. Always
have the air cleaner in placewhen you’re driving.
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter Replacement
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the
pollen from the air entering your vehicle and air
circulated inside the vehicle. Like your vehicle’s air
cleaner filter, it may need to be changed periodically.
For how often to change the passenger compartment air
filter, see your Maintenance Schedule booklet.
The access panel for the passenger compartment air
filter is on the grille, at the base of the windshield,
on the passenger’s side.
1. Open the hood of your vehicle.
2. Lift the engine compartment rear seal (see the arrow
in the illustration) and pull it back far enough to be
able to lift open the grille flap.
3. Unhook both retaining clips that secure the filter
in place.
4. Slide the filter toward the front of the car and then
pull the filter straight out.
6-17
dealership service department andhave it repaired as
soon as possible. You may also have your fluid level
checked by your dealer or service center when you have
your oil changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven underone
or more of these conditions:
5. Replace the filter by sliding it back in, reattaching
both retainer clips and closing the grille flap.
0
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.
0
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing.
0
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under anyof these
conditions, the fluid andfilter do not require changing.
6. Replace the engine compartment rear seal.
7. Close the engine hood.
For the type of filterto use, see “Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts” in the Index.
Auto-- ’ic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessaryto check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leakis the only reason forfluid
loss. If a leak occurs, takeyour Catera to a Catera
6-18
NOTICE:
We recommend you use onlyfluid labeled
[email protected],because fluid with that label
is
made especiallyfor your automatic transmission.
Damage caused byfluid other thanDEXRON-I11
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Rear Axle
What to Use
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” and “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in
the Maintenance Schedule booklet.
How to Check Lubricant
Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with new
DEX-COOL J engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL6 extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
I
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
6-19
A 50/50 mixture of water and the propercoolant for
your Catera will:
0
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection upto 265 "F (129 " C).
0
Protect against rust and corrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use [email protected](silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than [email protected] added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result.In addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage causedby the
use of coolant other than [email protected] is not
covered byyour new vehiclewarranty.
--
6-20
What to Use
Use a mixtureof one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-halfDEX-COOL' coolant which
won't damage aluminum parts. If you use this mixture,
you don't need to add anything else.
Adding only plainwater to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before
the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle's coolant warning
system isset for the proper coolant mix. With
plain water or the wrong mix,your engine could
get too hotbut you wouldn't get the overheat
warning. Your engine couldcatch fire and you or
others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and [email protected]
NOTICE:
Checking Coolant
If you use an improper coolant mix,your engine
could overheat and be badly damaged.The
repair cost wouldn't be covered
by your
warranty. Too much water in the mix can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don't have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. Thesecan be harmful.
The surge tank is located behind theair cleaner on the
passenger's side of the engine.
The cooling system when hotis under a lot of pressure.
If the low coolant warning light on the instrument panel
appears, you will need to add coolant.
6-21
-
Adding Coolant
CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator are hot.
--
--
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the KALT/COLD line (seam).
If this light comes on, it
means you’re low on
engine coolant.
For more information, see “Low Coolant Light” in
the Index.
6-22
If you need more coolant, add the [email protected]
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don’t spill coolant
on a hot engine.
When replacing the surge tank pressure cap, make sure
it is tight.
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Power SteeringFluid
NOTICE:
The surge tank cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed
to prevent coolant loss and possible engine
damage from overheating.
If the surge tank pressure cap needs to bereplaced, a
GM cap is recommended.
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in theengine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
The power steering fluid reservoir is located between
the battery andthe brake master cylinder on the driver’
side of the engine.
If the thermostat needs to bereplaced, a GM thermostat
is recommended.
When to CheckPower Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
6-23
Mow To Check Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and
look at thefluid level on the dipstick.
What to Use
The level should beat the full mark. There are two lines
on the dipstick. The top line is the “full” mark andthe
bottom line is the “add” line (which means that fluid
should be added).If necessary, addonly enough fluid
to bring the level up to the full mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind offluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet. Always use the
proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can
cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
When you need windshield washerfluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’sinstructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer
fluid reservoir is located
behind the front grille
on the driver’s side of
the engine.
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer
fluid until the tank is full.
6-24
Brakes
Brake Fluid
When usingconcentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluidtank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which coulddamage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your
windshield washer.It can damage your
washer systemand paint.
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
6-25
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
There are only two reasonswhy the brake fluid level in the
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level
goes back up.The other reasonis that fluid is leaking out
of the brake system.If it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well,or won’t work at all.
What to Add
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get newbrake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11 (GM
Part No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a
sealed container only.
@
0
r
If you have too muchbrake fluid, it can spillon
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add
brake
fluid only when workis done on the brake
hydraulic system.
6-26
With the wrong kind of fluid inyour brake
system, your brakes may not work well,or they
may not even work at all. This could causea
crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.
NOTICE:
0
0
Using the wrong fluid can badlydamage
brake system parts. Forexample, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll haveto be
replaced. Don’t let someoneput in the
wrong kindof fluid.
If you spill brake fluid onyour vehicle’s
painted surfaces,the paintfinish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle.If you do, wash it
off immediately. See“Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your Catera hasfour-wheel disc brakes.
Your Catera has electronic wear sensors that let you
know when the front brake pads aresignificantly worn
and new padsare needed. The brake pad wear indicator
light will come on and stay on when the brake pads
are
worn and needto be replaced. (See “Brake Pad Wear
Indicator Light” in the Index.)
The brake pad wear indicator light meansthat
soon yourbrakes won’t work well. That could
lead toan accident. When the brake pad wear
indicator light comes onand stays on, have your
vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads
could resultin costly brake repair.
6-27
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
Brake Adjustment
Properly torqued wheel bolts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel
bolts in the proper sequence to GM specifications.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection’’ in Section 7 of the
Maintenance Schedule booklet under Part C “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
6-28
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
The braking system on a modem vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Every new Catera has a Delco [email protected] You
never have to add water toone of these. When it’s time
for anew battery, werecommend a Delco [email protected]
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
For bulb types, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.
Batteries have acidthat can burn you and gas
that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips onworking around a battery without
getting hurt.
Halogen Bulbs
A CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and
can burst if you drop or scratch
the bulb.You or
others could beinjured. Be sure toread and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-29
Exterior Front Bulbs
Front Turn Signal Lamp
I
A
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B, Headlamp
6-30
1. With a screwdriver, unscrew the fastener on the
headlamp cover and then remove it to access the
turn signal lamps.
I
c
2. On the outboard side of each low-beam headlamp,
you will find the turn signal bulbs. Turn the lamp
assembly clockwise to remove.
3. Twist the bulb out to replace and then reassemble.
6-31
Headiamp
1. With a screwdriver, unscrew the fastener on the
headlamp cover and thenremove the cover to
gain access (see Step 1 under “Front TurnSignal
Lamp”). Note that theinner bulb is forthe
low-beam headlamp and the outer bulb is for
the high-beam headlamp.
IF-
3. Remove the plug connector from the bulb.
P
2. Remove the blackrubber cap that protects the
bulb area.
6-32
4. Squeeze the retaining clip together and then pull
down and awayfrom the bulb assembly.
5. Swivel the bulb out and then replace.
6-33
Exterior Rear Bulbs
I
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL is equipped with a high durability
illumination. If a bulb problem does occur, see your
Catera dealer for assistance.
#
Taillamp and Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk to access the lamp housing.
2. Depending on which outer bulb needs replacing,
open either the spare tire cover on the driver’s side
or the storage compartment on the passenger’s side
to access the bulbs.
3. Press the tab on the lamp housing up and then pull
the bulb assembly straightout.
4. Twist the bulb out and then replace it.
A. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
B . Taillamp
C. Rear Turn Signal Lamp
6-34
Note that the taillampisskrnbly running across me
rear deck lid is equipped with a high durability
illumination. If a bulb problem does occur, see your
Catera dealer for assistance.
Headlamp Aiming
To check the aim, the vehicle should be properly
prepared as follows:
0
The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surfxe.
The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
0
There should not be any cargo or loading of the
vehicle, except it should havea full tank of gas and
one person or 160 lbs. (75 kg) on the driver’s seat.
Tires should be properly inflated.
0
The horizontal indicator should read “0.”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has the 55 x 135 mini-quad headlamp
system. These headlamps have horizontal and vertical
aim indicators. The aim has been pre-set at the factory
and should need no further adjustment.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident and the
headlamp aim seems to be affected, see your Catera
dealer. Headlamps on damaged vehicles may require
recalibration of the horizontal aim by your Catera dealer.
To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before
beginning. Failure to follow these instructions
could cause damageto headlamp parts.
State inspection stations will allowa vertical reading of
plus 0.76 degrees or minus 0.76 degrees from the center
of the bubble.
6-35
It is recommended that the upper limit not exceed plus
0.4 degrees from the center of the bubble. Otherdrivers
may flash their highbeams at you if youradjustment is
much above plus 0.4 degrees.
Adjustment screws can be turned with an
E8 [email protected]
socket or a TI 5 Torx screwdriver.
If you find that theheadlamp aiming needs adjustment,
follow these steps:
1. With a screwdriver, unscrewthe fastener on the
headlamp cover and then remove the cover to be able
to see the backof the headlamp assembly.
6-36
2. Check the vertical aim for each headlamp and adjust
it as necessary. You can see the level through the
headlamp assembly. Turn the vertical aiming screw,
on the outboard side of the headlamp assembly, until
the bubble in the level is centered at0 (zero).
3. If the horizontal aim needs adjusting, see your
Catera dealer.
Wiper Blade Replacement
3. Replace the blade.
It’s agood idea toclean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type see “Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts” later in this section.
4. To reinstall the wiper blade assembly, slide it over
the wiper arm to engage the “J” hooked end on the
wiper blade assembly. Pull up on the assembly to
lock it intoplace.
To replace the wiper blade assembly:
1. Position the wipers on the windshield in the “mid”
wipe position.
2. Press the tabs together and pull the wiper blade
assembly down enough to release it from the “J”
hooked end of the wiper a r m . Slide the assembly
away from the arm.
I
6-37
Tires
Your newCatera comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Catera Warranty booklet for details.
I--
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
I
0 Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
/!\ CAUTION:
tread is badly worn,or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
See “Inflation Tire Pressure” in this section
are dangerous.
for inflation pressure adjustment for higher
0 Overloading your tires can cause overheating
speed driving.
as a result of too much friction.You could
have an airout and a serious accident. See
Inflation Tire Pressure
“Loading Your Vehicle” in theIndex.
0 Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is located
overloaded tires.The resulting accident
on the rear edge of the driver’s door,shows the correct
could causeserious injury. Check alltires
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
frequently to maintain the recommended
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
CAUTION: (Continued)
@
--
--
--
6-38
If you’ll be driving at speeds higher than 100 mph
(160 km/h) where it is legal, raise
the cold inflation
pressure of each tire to 37 psi (250 ma). When you end
this very high-speed driving, reduce the cold inflation
pressures to those listed on theTire-Loading
Information label.
I NOTICE:
1
’
~
1
Don’t let anyone tellyou that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not.If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
Too muchflexing
0 Toomuch heat
0 Tire overloading
Bad wear
0 Bad handling
0 Badfueleconomy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
I
NOTICE: (Continued)
~-. - .. .
-
. ~
~
If your tires have too much
air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
0 Unusual wear
0 Bad handling
0 Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazar
v
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them.Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-39
Tire Inspectionand Rotation
Tires should be rotatedat 5,000 miles (8 000 km) and
then every 10,000 miles ( 16 000 km)thereafter. Any
time you notice unusual wear,rotate your tires as soon
as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Timefor New
Tires” and “WheelReplacement” later in thissection for
more information.
When rotating your tires,always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
After the tireshave been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressuresas shown on the
Tire-Loading Information label. Make certain that
all wheel boltsare properly tightened. See “Wheel Bolt
Torque” in the Index.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services’’ inthe Maintenance Schedule
booklet for scheduled rotation intervals.
’
6-40
Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the parts which
to
it is fastened, can makewheel studs become loose
after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places wherewheel
the
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be
sure touse a scraper or wire brush later,
if you
need to, to get all the
rust or dirtoff. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the
Index.)
When It’s Time forNew Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
0
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or otherdamage that
can’t be repaired wellbecause of the size orlocation
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires thatare designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will befollowed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
6-41
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Mixing tires could cause
you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tiresof different sizesor types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tiresof different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tiresby
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply todeep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motorspassenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
6-42
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half
( 1 1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actualconditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
-- A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are A, B
and C , and they representthe tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government testsurfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature
-- A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
A and B represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusualtire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to bereset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to berebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel thatis bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel bolts keep coming loose, the wheel
and wheel bolts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks
air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). See your Catera dealer if any of
these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should havethe same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width,offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
6-43
If you need to replace any of your wheels or wheel
bolts, replace them only with newGM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel and wheelbolts for your Catera model.
Using the wrong replacement wheels and wheel
bolts onyour vehicle can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you lose
control. You could have a collision in which you
or others could beinjured. Always use the correct
wheel and wheel bolts for replacement.
I NOTICE:
The wrong wheelcan also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometeror
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tireor tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire”in the Index for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
I
Putting a used wheel onyour vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know howit’s been used or
how far it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you haveto replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
6-44
Tire Chains
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
I NOTICE:
0
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Use tire chains only where legaland only when
you must. Use onlySAE Class “S” type chains
that arethe proper size for your tires. Install
them on the rear tires and tighten them as tightly
as possible withthe ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains
contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them.
If the contact continues, slow downuntil it stops.
Driving toofast or spinning the wheels with
chains on willdamage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or getthem on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
Catera, be sureto follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
0
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
NailPolishRemover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses,these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
6-45
Cleaning the Insideof Your Catera
Using Foam-Type Cleaneron Fabric
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth.
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
Your Catera dealer has two cleaners, a solvent-type spot
lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean
normal spots and stains very well. Do not use them on
vinyl or leather.
Here are some cleaning tips:
1. Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
2. Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
3. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be usedif
stains are stubborn.
4. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area
only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area.
5 . If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or it will set.
6-46
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following
the directions on the container label.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6 . Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
7. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper
towel or cloth.
8. Dry it immediately with a blow dryer.
9. Wipe with a clean cloth.
Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric
2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all.
Some spots and stains will clean off better with just
water and mild soap.
Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left
on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They should be removed as
soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will
dissolve them and may cause them to spread.
If you need to use a solvent:
1. Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with
a clean, dull knife or scraper.
2. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths
(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the
outside of the stain, “feathering” toward the center.
3. Keep changing to a clean section of the cloth.
4. When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately
dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a
cleaning ring.
Special Cleaning Problems
Greasy or Oily Stains
Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe
polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic
creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can
be removed as follows:
Non-Greasy Stains
Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit
juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can
be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
6-47
Combination Stains
Cleaning Leather
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
Use a soft cloth withlukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry witha soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry.
3. If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.
0
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
0
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
0
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water anda clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if you don’t getthem off quickly. Use a clean
cloth and a vinyueather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
6-48
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and waterto clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Cleaning Speaker Covers
Care of Safety Belts
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker won’t be damaged. Some spots and stains
will clean off better with just water and mild soap.
If something gets on one of them and you need to use
a solvent, follow thesesteps:
Keep belts clean and dry.
1. Gently scrape excess soilfrom the trim material with
a clean, dullknife or scraper.
2. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths
(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the
outside of the stain, “feathering” toward the center.
I
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be ableto provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
3. Keep changing to a clean section of the cloth.
4. When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately
dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a
cleaning ring.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If
abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, anelectric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
6-49
Cleaning the Outsideof the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap or other material may be
on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon [email protected] (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse
it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
’
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last
longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak. Apply silicone
grease with a clean clothat least every six months.
During very cold, damp weathermore frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.)
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Catera
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish
is to keep
it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.
Don’t washyour vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or
that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning ExteriorLampsLenses
Use lukewarm or coldwater, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish or carwashing (mild detergent) soap to clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your Catera by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can getGM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Your Caterahasa“basecoatklearcoat”paintfinish.The
to the colored basecoat.
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and
made for a basecoatklearcoat paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish
may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash thevehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your Catera garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome
Wheels (If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax
may then beapplied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your Catera. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because youcould
damage the surface. You may use chrome polish on
chrome wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the
wheel, and buff off immediately after application.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
6-51
Tires
c
To clean your tires, use a stiffbrush with atire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care
to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaceson the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage
the paint finish.
6-52
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer orother service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in yourdealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust
control can collect on
the underbody. If these are
not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur
on the underbody parts such as fuellines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This
damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frameshould be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Cadillac
will repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km)of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-53
Appearance Care Materials Chart
PARTNUMBER
I
SIZE
I
DESCRIPTION
I
I
~~~
~
- II
USAGE
in.
25xin.
23
1 Polishing
Cloth
- Wax Treated
Exterior
Polish
I 2.75 sq. 6. I
Chamois
I
vehicle
Shines
without
scratching
Also removes old waxes and polishes
Tar and Road Oil Remover
16 oz. (0.473 L)
oz. (0.473 L)
Removes rust and corrosion Chrome Cleaner and Polish
Removes soil and black marks
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
16 oz. (0.473 L)
1 gal.
(3.785 L) I Magic
Mirror
Cleaner
Polish
I
Exterior
cleaner
and
polish
10502OO
32 oz. (0.946 L)
Spot and stain removal Vinyl Cleaner
1050214
Cleans grease, grime and smoke film
Glass Cleaner
1050427
23 oz. (0.680 L)
Exterior wash
oz. (0.473 L)
Wash and Wax Concentrate 16
1052870
Protects vinyl, leather and rubber
Armor All” Protector
8 oz-(0.237 L)
1052918**
Cleans vinyl, cloth, tires and mats Multi-Purpose Powde
1052925
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Spray on wheel cleaner Wheel Cleaner
16 oz. (0.473 L)
1052929
Dry Spot Remover
Attracts and absorbs soils Capture
1052930
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Armor All Cleaner 16 oz. (0.473 Cleans vinyl, leatherand rubber
L)
Shines tires
L)
Silicone Tire Shine 12 oz. (0.354
12377964
oz. (0.473 L)
Wax 16
Protects finish and removesfine scratches Cleaning
16 oz. 0.473 L)
Finish
Enhancer
Spot
cleans
paint
and
gives
high
luster
12377966
** Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.
994954
1050004
1050172
1050 173
1050174
I
I
I
6-54
TM
I
1
I
-1
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
I I. 11111.11
1-11
On this label is:
your VIN,
the model designation,
1
1
.1
paint information and
111 111111 II. 111111 1. 111111111111111111111 I I
SAMPLE4UXVM072675
E N G I N E A 9 7
MODEL
CODE
YEAR
111
\ PLANT
ASSEMBLY
0
a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
This isthe legal identifier for your Catera. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8thcharacter in your VIN is theengine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label behind the passenger’s side access
panel in the trunk (panel that covers the trunk mounted
CD changer). It’s very helpful if you ever need to
order parts.
Add-on Electrical Equipment
I
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your Catera
unless
you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical
equipment can damageyour vehicle and the
damage wouldn’tbe covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipmentcan keep other
components from workingas they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your Catera, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Catera” in the Index.
Headlamp Wiring
MaxiFuseRelay Center
The headlamp wiring has an individual fuse which is
powered by a [email protected] electrical overload will
cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to
remain off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring
checked right away.
MaxiFuse is a registered trademark of Little
Fuse Incorporated.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is powered by a MaxiFuse.
If the motor overheats due toheavy snow, etc., the
wipers will stop until the motor cools. If the overload
is caused by some electrical problem, be sure to have
it fixed.
Power Windowsand Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories, When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
6-56
The MaxiFuseRelaycenter is attached to the engine
compartment fuse block on top of the battery. Simply
lift the lid to open. If you have any questions about the
MaxiFuseRelay Center, consult your Catera dealer.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Driver’s Side)
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
the short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused
by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that you
can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as youcan.
The fuse block is located below thesteering wheel on
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the instrument
panel fuse blocks and the engine compartment relay center. the driver’s side. Using a screwdriver, loosen the two
trim fasteners under the trim panel and pull the trim
panel away from the instrument panel to
access.
6-57
33 HEATER BLOWER
I
I 35PWRSEAT
34 RR WDO DEFOG
I
9
10
11
15a
HTD
MIRROR
WIPER CLAMP
12
HZD
13
1
PWF
14
CIG
2
15
16
CLAMP 15 CLAMP15
CRUISE
AfT
3
4
HORN
18
FUEL
PUMP
5
6
AUDIO
17
CUMPIS FLASHER HTDSEAT CLAMP30
PESL
RE4R
All
19
ABS
7
PWR
20
HIDSEAT
FRONT
8
RADIO
BAH GUARD
Fuse Usage
1
RH and LH Front Side Door Window
Regulator Motor,LH Front Side Door Window
Switch
2
Stoplamp Switch
Automatic Transmission Switch and Control
3
Indicator, Power Steering Control Module,
Hazard WarningSwitch
4
RH and LH Rear Seat Cushion Heater Relay
Transmission Control Module
5
6
Sound Processor Amplifier
6-58
Fuse Usage
7 RH and LH Rear Side Door Window
Regulator Motor
Headlamp Switch, Turn Signal Switch, Horn
8
Relay, CD Changer, Multifunction Relay
Module
Windshield Wiper Motor and Relay, Windshield
9
Wiper and Windshield Washer Switch
10 Body Control Module (BCM), Auxiliary
Water Pump, Heater and A/C Control, Fan
Control Relays
11 Heater and A/C Control, RH and LH Outside
Rearview Mirrors, Outside Remote Control
Rearview Mirror Switch
12 Hazard WarningSwitch, Instrument Cluster,
Data Link Connector (DLC), Stoplamp
Switch, Gage Cluster, Heater andA/C Control
13 Remote Control Outside Rearview Mirror
Switch, A/C Compressor Relay, Test
Connector, A/C Control Switch
14 Cellular Telephone, Cigarette Lighter, RH and
LH Windshield Washer Nozzle, Driver and
Passenger Heated Seat Switch, Heater and A/C
Control, Heated Outside Rearview Mirror and
Rear Window Defogger Relay
Fuse Usage
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Rear Suspension Leveling Air Compressor
Relay, Instrument Cluster, Gage Cluster,
Cruise Control Switch and Module, Headlamp
Switch, Multifunction Relay Module,
Passenger and Driver Heated Seat Relay,
BCM, Sunroof Actuator, Automatic Level
Control Sensor, RH and LH Heated Rear Seat
Switch and Cushion Relay, Driver Seat
Adjuster Memory Module, LH Front Side
Door Window Switch, Inside Rearview Mirror
Transmission Control Module
Horn #I and #2
Fuel Pump
Electronic Brakemraction Control Module
Passenger and Driver Heated Seat Relay
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) Relay, LH
High-Beam Headlamp Relay
Headlamp Switch and LH Low-Beam
Headlamp
Multifunction Relay Module, LHPark/T.urn
Signal Lamp, LH StopRaillamp, LH Rear Side
Marker Lamp
Fuse
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Usage
Lifting Magnet, BCM, Gage Cluster
Sunroof Actuator
Headlamp Switch, RH and LH Front Side
Marker Lamp, Middle Taillamp, RH and LH
Rear License Plate Lamp, Radio, Automatic
Transmission Control Indicator, Heater and
A/C Control
Automatic Level Control Sensor, Rear
Suspension Leveling Air Compressor
and Relay
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver, Door
Lock Relay, Rear Compartment Lid Release
Connector (Not Used)
Multifunction Relay Module
RH Park/Turn Signal Lamp and RH
StopRaillamp, RH Rear Side Marker Lamp
Turn Signal Switch and RH Low-Beam
Headlamp
RH High-Beam Headlamp Relay
Blower, A/C Compressor Relay
Heated Outside Rearview Mirror and Rear
Window Defogger Relay
Passenger and Driver Seat Adjuster Switches,
Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Module
6-59
Instrument PanelFuse Block (Passenger’s Side)
HI BEAM LH
I[:
ALC
m
rn
PRK LP
m
Ip
LO BEAM
f
I
RR WDO DEFOG
HTD MIRROR
FLASHER
P
IZI
HI BEAM RH
HORN
7x
x
x
DRL
6-60
\
Fusemelay
I
I1
I11
IV
V
VI
VI1
VI11
IX
X
XI
Usage
High-Beam Headlamp - LH
Automatic Level Control
Heated Rear Window, Heated
Power Mirrors
Hazard Warning Flashers
High-Beam Headlamp - RH
Horn
Parking Lamps
Low-Beam Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Engine Compartment Relay Center
The relay center islocated next to the battery on the
driver’s side of the engine. Lift the cover to access.
I
Fuse
1
2
3
4
I Usage
I
Secondary Air Induct
A/C Blower-Radiator
Coolant Pump Follow-Up
Interval Windshield Washer and Wiper
6-61
Fuse
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
15
16
17
18
19
20
27
28
29
39
6-62
Usage
A/C Compressor Number
A/C Blower-Radiator
A/C Blower-Radiator
A/C Blower-Radiator
Secondary AirInduct
Injection Valves
Blower-Radiator
A/C Blower-Radiator
Plug Connection
A/CBlower-Radiator
A/C Blower-Radiator
Relay
Fuel Pump
Oxygen Exhaust Sensor
Control Unit
Blower Box
Diagnostic Plug Connection
Replacement Bulbs
Bulb
Application
Front Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps Composite
Inner High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outer Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Turn Signal Lamp and Taillamp . . . .
90487485
905 12338
905 12338
90002521
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications
Displacement . . . . . . . . . 181 cubic inches (2 962 cc)
3.0 L DOHC V6
Type .........................
R
VIN Engine Code ...........................
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 (bhp) @ 6000 rpm
149 (kW) @ 6000 rpm
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 (lb-ft) 0 3600 rpm
260 (N-m) @ 3600 rpm
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-3-4-5-6
. . . . 198"F(9Z°C)
Thermostat Starts To Open .
Capacities
Transmission ................. 7.0 quarts (6.6 L)
Engine Crankcase
Oil Change With Filter* ...... 6.1 quarts (5.75L)
Oil Change Without Filter*
5.8 quarts (5.5 L)
Engine Cooling System
10.6 quarts ( I O L)
FuelTank ................... 18 gallons (68. I L)
R-i 34a Refrigerant,.............. 2.9 lbs. (0.95 kg)
Vehicle Dimensions
WheelBase ............. 107.4 inches (272.8 cm)
Length ................... 194 inches (492.8 cm)
Height..
56.3 inches (143.1 cm)
Width
70.3inches (178.6 cm)
Front Tread ............... 59.3 inches ( 150.6 cm)
Rear Tread ................ .59.8 inches (152 cm)
Wheel Bolt Torque
80 lb-ft ( I 10 N-m)
....
.........
.................
...................
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Air Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905093 18
Fuel Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90437575
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 156300
Passenger’s Compartment
90510338
Air Filter .........................
Spark Plugs . . . 90541059 (Bosch Plug = FLR9LTE)
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90502201
Windshield Wiper Blade . . . . . . . . . . 905 12807 (RH)
905 12808(LH)
............
* Recheck theoil level
afterfilling. See “Engine Oil” in
the Index.
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the
same.
I f the air conditioning systemin your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.
I f you’re not sure, askyour Catera dealer.
6-63
$&l
6-64
NOTES
@% NOTES
6-65
&
6-66
NOTES
/-"'
-=-a
Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Cadillac if you need assistance..This section also tells you how to obtain service
publications and how to report any safety defects.
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-1 1
7- 12
7- 12
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY)Users
Roadside Service
GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
7- 13
7-13
7- 13
7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
1997 Cadillac Service Publications
Ordering Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Catera dealers have the facilities, trained technicians and
up-to-date information to promptly address any
concerns you may have. However,if a concern has not
been resolved toyour complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concernscan
be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matterhas
already been reviewed with theSales, Service or Parts
Manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
General Manager.
7-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot
be resolved by the dealership without further help,
contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center,
24 hours a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
For help outside of the United States and Canada,
call the following numbers as appropriate:
0 In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-75 1-4136 (Spanish)
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
0
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763- 1315
0
In other overseas locations, call GM International
Product Center in Canada at (905) 644-41 12.
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
7-3
For prompt assistance, please have the following
information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
0
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
0
Nature of concern
We encourage you to callus so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Cadillac, address your inquiry to:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
30009 Van Dyke
P.O. Box 9025
Warren, MI 48090-9025
7-4
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L 1H 8P7
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for addressesof GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely beresolved in the dealership, using
the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel. That is
why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have
a concern.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Roadside Service
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessaryCatera parts
and toolsrequired to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service can be reached by dialing
1-800-882- 1112,24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any
warranty-covered situation and for a nominal
charge if the Catera is no longer under warranty.
Roadside Service is available only in the United
States and Canada.
TOLL-FREE HOTLINE
1=800=882-1112
Cadillac Owner Privileges
TM
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges at “no charge,” throughout your 1997
Cadillac Warranty Period -- 48 Months/.O,000 miles
(80 000 km).
TM
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service ismore than an
auto club ortowing service. It provides every Catera
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, when appropriate, a Catera trained dealer
technician who canprovide on-site service.
7-5
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
0
Towing Service
0
Battery Jump Starting
0
Lock Out Assistance
FuelDelivery
0
0
7-6
Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
Trip Interruption -- If your trip is interrupted due
to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km)warranty period. Items covered are
hotel, meals andrental car.
Roadside Service Availability
Wherever you drive inthe United States or Canada,
an advisor is available to assist you over the phone.
A dealer technician, if available, can travel to your
location within a 30 mile (50 km)radius, of a
participating Catera dealership. If beyond this radius,
we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest
Catera dealership.
Reaching Roadside Service
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882- 1112. An experienced Roadside
Service Advisor will assist you and request the
following information:
0 A description of the problem
0 Name, home address, home telephone number
0 Location of your Catera and number you are
calling from
The model year, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
mileage and date of delivery
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Roadside Service isprepared to assist owners who have
hearing difficulties or arespeech impaired. Cadillac has
installed special telecommunication devices called Text
Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-800-833-CMCC -- daily, 24 hours.
7-7
Gold Key Courtesy Transportation
One of your Cadillac Owner Privileges is Gold Key
Courtesy Transportation. It isjust onemore example of
Cadillac's commitment to provide the services you
expect and deserve as a Catera owner.
Gold Key Courtesy Transportation helps you
get where
you need to be when your Catera is in the dealership for
warranty service.*
In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation.
Transportation Options*
Our Cadillac Dealer Technician network is ready and
able to assist Catera customers at roadside.
7-8
Warranty work can frequently be handled inone day,
but there is often no reason for you to wait at the
dealership. Cadillac helps minimize inconvenience
to you by providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealership
can offeryou one of the following options:
Shuttle Service”
Your dealership can provide you with shuttle service to
get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule when your Catera is unavailable due
to a warranty repair.
Courtesy Vehicle*
For repairs that require your vehicle to be unavailable to
you for an extended period of time, your dealer may
arrange to provide you with a courtesy vehicle from the
dealership, or one obtained from alocal rental agency.
Miscellaneous Service*
Should the situation necessitate making your own
arrangements, Gold Key Courtesy Transportation
provides for reimbursement of personally arranged
transportation such as cab fare, reasonable fuel expenses
for a rideprovided by another individual or a rental
vehicle obtained froman independent source.
“Some restrictions may apply. Please consult your
Catera dealer concerning specific Gold Key Courtesy
Transportation benefits offered by the dealership.
Plan Ahead When Possible
Whenever possible, scheduling an appointment for your
vehicle’s warranty service and advising your service
consultant that you wish to takeadvantage of Gold Key
Courtesy Transportation can help minimize your
inconvenience by allowing your dealer to prepare
arrangements to fulfill your transportation needs in
advance of your visit.
7-9
Owner Responsibilities
You are responsible for primary insurance coverage of
the vehicle provided. In manycases, your own auto
insurance policy may provide this coverage under
provisions for rental car agreements. Please consult your
insurance carrier to be certain of what’s covered.
While your dealership will cover the rental expense of
a vehicle provided under the provisions of Gold Key
Courtesy Transportation, you are responsible for
charges incurred for such items as fuel used, additional
insurance coverage and any taxesor fees levied by state
or local governmental agencies.
7-10
It is important that yourvehicle be picked up fromthe
dealership promptly following the completion of your
repairs. If your vehicle is not picked up from the
dealership within a reasonable amount of time following
notification from the dealer, you may
be responsible
for any additional rental charges incurred as a result
of this delay.
For Canadian Vehicles
In Canada, for warrantyrepairs during the Complete
Vehicle Coverage period inthe New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, interim transportation may beavailable under
the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please
consult
your dealer for details.
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its
participation in this program.
Both Cadillac and your Catera dealer are committed
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your
new vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if a
situation arises where you feel your concern has not
been adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure described earlier in this section is
very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Cadillac voluntarily participates in BBB
AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system
to settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203- 1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statement of the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
7-11
We prefer you utilizethe Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before youresort to AUTO LINE, but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary.If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will
be scheduled whereeligible customers may present their
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which youmay
accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be
bound by that decision. The entiredispute resolution
procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the
time you file a claim until a decision is made.
Some state laws may require you to use this program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program
or in thecourts. For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Cadillac Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-458-8006.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved
in individual problems between you, yourdealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington,D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from theHotline.
7-12
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE CANADIAN
GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, OntarioKlG 3J2
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals and
other service literature are available for purchase for all
current and past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please callus at 1-800-458-8006 or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
30009 Van Dyke
P.O. Box 9025
Warren, MI 48090-9025
7-13
1997 CADILLAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing
of your vehicle canbe purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form
in this book and mailing
it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1997 CADILLAC
OWNER’S INFORMATION
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals havethe diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
vehicle. The owner’s manualwill include the Maintenance
electrical, steering, body, etc.
Schedule for all models.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1997 GM transmissions, transaxlesand transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual
and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name
of the vehicle.
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Disr)
.
.
s
tl
1
P
'
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer
or company name, and also the
name of the personto whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outsideU.S.A. please writeto the above addressfor quotation.
0
VISA
.
.:
-
MasterCard
: :
.
Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, lnc, (USA funds
otity do not
C0Sh.)
(CUSTOMER'S
NAME)
(AlTENTION)
n
$
'
..,
.
.
.
.
... .
,
(STREETADDRESS-NO
P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
DAYTIME TELEPHONENO.
AREA CODE
GM-CAD-ORD97 *(Prices are subject
to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.)
Note to Canadian Customers:All listed prices are quoted in
U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payablein U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add$11 50 plus the
U.S.order processing.
k%
7-16
NOTES
....
Section 8 Index
ABS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3
AirBag .......................................
1-25
How Does it Restrain ..........................
1-30
How it Works ................................
1-27
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Readiness Light .........................
1.27,2.63
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-32
What Makes it Inflate ..........................
1-30
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
When Should it Inflate ..........................
1-9
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Air Conditioning Refrigerants .....................
6-63
Alarm. Theft-Deterrent ..........................
2- 12
Alignment and Balance. Tire ......................
6-43
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning ......................
6-5 1
Antenna.HeatedBacklite ........................
3-24
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 19
Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66.4.7
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Anti-LockoutFeature ............................
2-6
Appearancecare ...............................
6-45
Appearance Care Materials Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Ashtrays ......................................
2-49
Assist Handles .................................
2-51
Audio Equipment. Adding ........................
3-22
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ....................
3-20
Audio Systems ..................................
3-9
Automatic Door Locks ............................ 2-4
Automatic Operation ............................. 3-3
Automatic Transmission
Operation ...................................
2-19
Shifting ....................................
2-19
Fluid ......................................
6-18
WarningLight ...............................
2-75
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Axle.Rear ....................................
6-19
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Replacement. Remote Keyless Entry............... 2-8
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3. 5.5
BBB Auto Line ................................
7-11
Better Business Bureau Mediation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
8-1
Brake
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
Fluid .......................................
6-25
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
2-24
Parking .....................................
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
System Warning Light .........................
2-64
To Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Transmission Shift Interlock ....................
2-27
Wear .......................................
6-27
Brake Pad Wear Indicator Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Brakes. Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 10
Break-In. New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
BTSI .........................................
2-27
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Capacities and Specifications ....................
6-62
4.29.4.35
Carbon Monoxide .........................
3- 12. 3. 15
Cassette Tape Player .......................
3-22
Cassette Tape Player Care ........................
Cassette Tape Player Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 12. 3. 15
Cellular Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 1
2-48
Center Console Storage Area......................
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp. Bulb Replacement . . . 6-34
Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
2-4
Central Door Unlocking System ....................
4-30
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
Chains.Safety .................................
6-45
Chains. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Changing a Flat Tire.............................5-23
Charging System Indicator Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Check Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
2-73
Check Oil Light ................................
Checking Your Restraint Systems .................. 1-50
Chemical Paint Spotting.......................... 6-53
ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position. . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position.......... 1-43
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
CHMSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
Chrome Wheels. Cleaning ........................ 6-51
CigaretteLighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Cleaner.Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome Wheels ................... 6-51
Exterior LampsLenses ........................ 6-51
Fabric ................................. 6-46. 6-47
GlassSurfaces ............................... 6-49
Inside of Your Catera .......................... 6-46
6-48
InstrumentPanel .............................
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48
Outside of Your Catera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6-49
Speakercovers ..............................
SpecialProblems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47.6-48
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
6-48
Vinyl .......................................
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Climate Control System ...........................
3-2
3-9
Clock. Setting the ................................
Comfort Controls ................................
3-2
Compact Disc Care .............................
3-23
Compact Disc Changer Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 19
Console Shift Lever .............................
2-25
Console Storage ................................
2-48
Control of a Vehicle ..............................
4-6
Convenience Net ...............................
2-49
Convex Outside Mirror ..........................
2-47
Coolant .......................................
6-19
Heater. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
SurgeTank ..................................
5-18
CoolingSystem ................................
5-16
Cornering Lamps ...............................
2-42
2-35
Cruise Control .................................
Cruise Control Light ............................
2-73
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users
. . . . . . . . . 7-4
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Damage. Finish ...............................
6-52
Damage. Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Daytime Running Lamps .........................
2-40
DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Defects. Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 12. 7. 13
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Defogger. Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Defrosting .....................................
3-8
6-63
Dimensions.Vehicle ............................
[email protected] Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13. 3-16
Door
Central Unlocking System .......................
2-4
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Drive Position. Automatic Transmission .............2-21
DriverPosition ................................. 1-17
Driver’s Side Instrument PanelFuse Block ........... 6-57
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob .................... 3-2
Driving
City ........................................ 4-20
Defensive ....................................
4-2
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Freeway ....................................
4-21
InaBlizzard .................................
4-28
In Foreign Countries ...........................
6-5
In the Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Night ......................................
4-15
OnCurves .................................. 4-10
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
On Hill and MountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
On Snow and Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Throughwater ............................... 4-20
Winter ......................................
4-25
WithaTrailer ................................
4-36
DRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
DrunkenDriving ................................
4-3
ECC
......................................... 3-2
Electrical Equipment, Adding .....................
2-17
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror .......... 2-46
Electronic Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
8-3
2-51
Electrmic Level Control .........................
4-32
Filter Replacement. Passenger CompartmentAir ...... 6- 17
Emergency Trunk Release ........................
2-10
Finish Care ....................................
6-51
F i s h Damage .................................
6-52
Engine .........................................
6-9
Compartment Relay Center .....................
6-61
First Gear. Automatic Transmission ................2-21
.....................................
Flashers. Hazard Warning .........................
5-2
CoOltUlt
6-19
2- 17
Caolant Heater ...............................
Flash-To-PassFeature ...........................
2-33
Coolant Temperature Gage .....................
2-68
Flat Tire. Changing .............................
5-23
Coolant Temperature Warning
....................................
Mats Light ..............2-68
Floor
Fog Latsps ....................................
2-42
2-29
E x hst~.....................................
6-55
Identification ................................
Folding the Rear Seat.............................
1-10
Overheating .................................
5-14
Foreign Countries. Fuel ...........................
6-5
Running While Parked .........................
2-29
ii
French Language Manual ...........................
Front Turn Signal Lamp. Bulb Replacement .......... 6-30
Spscifications ................................
6-62
S m g YOU ................................
2-16
Fuel ..........................................
6-3
EngineOil ....................................
6-10
DoorLock ...................................
6-6
6-5
Adding .....................................
6-11 Filling Your Tank ..............................
...................................
Gage
..................................
.
.
,
2-75
Additives
13
Checking ...................................
In Foreign Countries ...........................
6-5
6- 11
6-57
Used .......................................
6-14 Fuses and Circuit Breakers .......................
When to Change ..............................
6-13
2-61
Engine Speed Limiter ............................
Gages
3-3
FmglishMetricDisplay ...........................
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
2-63
Ethan01 ........................................
6-4
Fuel .......................................
2-75
2-29
Exhaust, Engine ................................
OilPressure .................................
2-72
Exteri~F r a t Bulbs .............................
6-30
GarmentHooks ................................
2-51
Exterior Lamps .................................
2-38
G A M .......................................
4-30
6-34
Exterior RW Bulbs .............................
Gear Positions. Automatic Transmission ............. 2-19
....................................
Box
Glove
6.46.6.47
Fabric cleaning ..........................
Gold Key Courtesy Transportation .................. 7-8
Fan Button. Climate Control System ................. 3-2
Gross Axle Weight Rating ........................
4-30
Gross
Vehicle
Weight
Rating
......................
4-30
6-5
FillingYourTank ................................
Filter. Air .....................................
6-15
...
2-48
8-4
..
Guide en FranGais . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Handles. Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
HeadRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Head Restraints. Removable .......................
1-8
Headlamps ....................................
2-39
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
OnReminder ................................
2-40
Wiper Activated .............................. 2-40
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-56
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Heated Backlite Antenna .........................
3-24
Heated Seats ...............................
1.6. 1. I 1
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
High-Beam Headlamps .......................... 2-33
Highway Hypnosis ..............................
4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads .........................
4-24
Hitches. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
H o .~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Hydraulic Brake Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Hydroplaning ..................................
4-19
Ignition Positions ..............................
2- 15
Illuminated Entry ...............................
2-44
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror ....................
2-50
Immobilizer ...................................
2-13
Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-38
InstrumentPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Cleaning ....................................
6-48
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
FuseBlock .............................
6-57. 6-60
Interior Lamps .................................
2-44
Jack. Tire ...............................
5.25.5.26
Jump Starting ...................................
5-3
Keyless Entry.Remote ..........................
2-6
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Labels
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Tire-Loading Information ......................
4-30
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Lamps
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Leaving Your Vehicle .............................
2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-26
Leveling Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76
Light Sensor. Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
8-5
LQw Fuel Light .................................
2-75
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ...................2-74
Lumbar ControIs ................................
1-3
Maintenance. Normal Replacement parts. . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Maintenance. Underbody .........................
6-53
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Towing
Trailer
Maintenance
When
4-38
Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp
...................... 2-69
Manual Folding Outside Rearview Mirror
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Manual Front Passenger's Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Manual Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
ManualOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
MapLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
MapPockets ...................................
2-48
MaxiFuse/Relay Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Memory Seat and Mirrors ......................... 1-5
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Mirrors .......................................
2-46
Convex Outside ..............................
2-47
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Illuminated Visor Vanity .......................
2-50
Power Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
MMT .........................................
6-4
ModeButton ...................................
3-3
ModelReference ..................................
ii
4-24
MountainRoads ................................
Multifunction Lever .............................
2-32
N e t . Convenience ..............................
2-41)
Neutral. Automatic " m i s s i o n .................. 2-20
New Vehicle "Break-ln" .........................
2-14
.
.
.
I
I
Nightvision
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 1
Odometer. Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 12
Oil. Engine .................................... 6-10
Oil Pressure LighVGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Outside Rearview Mirror. Manual Folding . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Outside Temperature Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Overheating Engine ............................. 5- 14
Owner Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 13. 7- 14
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Park
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 19
Shifting Into .................................
2-25
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Parking
AtNight .................................... 2-11
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Over Things That Burn ........................
2-28
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Passenger Compartment Air Filter................... 3-8
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement....... 6-17
Passenger’s Side Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . 6-60
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob ................. 3-2
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Power
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
6-56
OptionFuses ................................
Recliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Remote Control Mirror ........................ 2-47
Retained Accessory ........................... 2-16
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Steering .................................... 4-10
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
Windows ................................... 2-30
Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts .................... 1-24
Problems on the Road ............................
5-1
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-5
Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 13. 7-14
R a d i o Reception ..............................
3-21
Radios .................................. 3.10.3.13
Rain. Driving In ................................
4-17
RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
ReadingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Rear
Axle .......................................
6-19
Door Security Lock ............................
2-5
Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32
Seatpassengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
WindowDefogger ............................. 3-9
RearSeats ..................................... 1-10
Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Rear Window Lockout ........................... 2-31
Rearview Mirror, Electrochromic Daymight . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Recirculation ................................... 3-5
1-6
Reclining Front Seatbacks .........................
Refrigerants, Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
8-7
Remote
Fuel Door Release ............................. 6-6
KeylessEntrySystem ..........................
2-6
1-8
Removable Head Restraints ........................
Replacement
Bulbs ......................................
6-62
Parts .......................................
6-63
Wheel ......................................
6-43
1-5 1
Replacing Safety Belts ...........................
7- 12. 7- 13
Reporting Safety Defects ....................
Restraints
Checking ...................................
1-50
Child .......................................
1-39
Head ........................................
1-8
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 1
Retained Accessory Power........................
2- 16
Reverse. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
1-25
Right Front Passenger Position ....................
RKE ..........................................
2-6
Roadside Service ................................
7-5
5-33
Rocking YourVehicle ...........................
Rotation. Tires ................................. 6-40
Safety Belts ..................................
1.1 1
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Care .......................................
6-49
1-35
Center Passenger Position ......................
Children ....................................
1-37
1 - 17
Driver Position ...............................
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-50
1- 16
How to Wear Properly .........................
8-8
IncorrectUsage ....................
1.20.1.48.
1-49
LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-36
1.17. 1-32
Lap-Shoulder ...........................
LargerChildren ..............................
1-47
1.16
Questions and Answers ........................
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1-32
Rear Seat Passengers ..........................
1
.
12.
2.62
ReminderLight .........................
Replacing After a Crash........................
1-51
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Smaller Children and Babies ....................
1-37
Use During Pregnancy .........................
1-24
WhyTheyWork ..............................
1-13
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Safety Defects. Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12.7.13
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Seatback
Power Recliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
RecliningFront ...............................
1-6
Seats
1.6. 1.11
Heated .................................
Manual Front Passenger’s .......................
1-2
Manual Lumbar Support ........................
1-3
Memory Seat and Mirrors .......................
1-5
Power .......................................
1-4
1-10
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
1-2
Seatcontrols .................................
Securing a Child Restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1. 1-3 1. 1-45
Second Gear. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Service ........................................
6-2
Bulletins. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13.7. 14
Manuals. Ordering .......................
7.13.7.14
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13.7.14
Work. Doing Your Own .........................
6-2
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :. .... 6-1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13.7.14
Service Publications ........................
7.13.7.14
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Catera ............ 1-32
SheetMetalDamage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
ShiftLever ....................................
2-25
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 19
Into PARK (P) ...............................
2-25
Out of PARK (P) .............................
2-27
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster.....................
1-19
SignalingTurns ................................
2-32
Skidding ......................................
4-14
Sound Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Speaker Covers. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Specifications and Capacities ......................
6-62
Specifications. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
2-61
Speedometer ...................................
2-22
SportModeButton ..............................
SSS ..........................................
4-10
Stains. Cleaning ...........................
6.47. 6.48
Starting Your Engine ............................
2- 16
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
4-10
xeenng ......................................
In Emergencies ...............................
4-11
Power ......................................
4-10
Speedsensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Tips ........................................
4-10
Wheel. Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Steering Wheel Controls for Audio System........... 3-20
Storage Area. Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Storage Compartments ...........................
2-48
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
2-50
Sunvisors ....................................
Sunroof .......................................
2-51
Surge Tank. Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Surge Tank Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Symbols. Vehicle .................................
vii
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Taillamp. Bulb Replacement ......................
6-34
TapePlayerCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Telephone.Cellular .............................
2-51
Temperature Knobs. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Theft-Deterrent Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Theft-Deterrent Feature. Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
6-23
Thermostat ....................................
Third Gear. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Third-Gear Start ................................
2-23
2-32
Tilt Steering Wheel .............................
Time. Setting the ................................
3-9
Tire Chains ....................................
6-45
8-9
Tires .........................................
6-38
6-43
Alignment and Balance ........................
Buying New .................................
6-41
Chains .....................................
6-45
ChangingaFlat ..............................
5-23
6-52
Cleaning ....................................
Inflation ....................................6-38
6-40
Inspection and Rotation ........................
Loading Information Label ..................... 4-30
Pressure ....................................6-38
Temperature ................................. 6-43
Traction .................................... 6-42
6-42
Treadwe ar...................................
6-42
Uniform Quality Grading .......................
Wear Indicators ..............................
6-41
Wheel Replacement ...........................
6-43
When It's Time for New .......................
6-41
TopStrap .....................................
1-38
2-2 6
TorqueLock ...................................
5-31, 6-63
Torque, Wheel Bolt ........................
Towing a Trailer ................................ 4-32
Towing Your Catera ..............................5-8
Traction
Control System ................................
4-9
Control System Warning Light .............. 2-67. 4-9
Traction Engaged ............................... 2-67
Trailer
Brakes .....................................
4- 36
Driving on Grades ............................
4-37
8-10
4-36
Driving with .................................
Hitches .....................................
4-35
Maintenance When Towing .....................
4-38
Parking on Hills ..............................
4-38
4-36
Safety Chains ................................
Tongueweight ............................... 4-34
Total Weight on Tires ..........................4-35
Towing ..................................... 4-32
Turnsignals ................................. 4-37
4-34
Weight .....................................
Transmission Fluid. Automatic .................... 6-18
Transmitter.Universal ...........................
2-54
Transmitters. Remote Keyless Entry System ........... 2-6
Transportation. Gold Key Courtesy .................. 7-8
Trip Odometer .................................2-61
Trunk
Ajar Light ...................................
2-74
Mounted CD Changer ......................... 3-17
Release ..................................... 2-10
TTYUsers .....................................7-4
Turn and Lane Change Signals .................... 2-32
Turn SignaUMultifunction Lever ...................2-32
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer................ 4-37
TwilightSentinel ...............................2-43
Underbody Maintenance ........................ 6-53
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-21
Universal Transmitter............................ 2-54
Vehicle
4-6
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DamageWarnings ..............................
vi
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63
Identification Number .........................
6-55
Ventilation System ...............................
3-7
Visor Vanity Mirror. Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Visors. Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-50
Voltmeter .....................................
2-65
w a r n i n g Devices ...............................
5-3
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Warranty Information............................
7- 12
Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................
6-24
WashingYourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Weatherstrips ..................................
6-50
Wheel
Alignment ..................................
6-43
BoltTorque ............................
5.31.6.63
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Wrench .....................................
5-26
Windows .....................................
2-30
Power ......................................
2-30
RearLockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2-34
WindshieldWasher .............................
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-34, 6-24
Windshield Wipers ..............................
2-33
BladeReplacement ...........................
6-37
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56
Winter Driving .................................
4-25
Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................
2-40
Wiring,Headlamp ..............................
6-56
Wrench. Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
8-11
/s’
-a*
Service Station Checkpoints
FUEL
ENGINE COOLANT
SURGE TANK
P6-21
P6-5 AND P6-6
TIRES
P6-38
DOOR
SECONDARY
HOOD RELEASE
P6-8
WINDSHIELD
WASHER FLUID
P6-24
/
REMOTE
BATTERY
TERMINAL
P5-3
HOOD
RELEASE
P6-8
\
REMOTE FUEL
DOOR AND TRUNK
RELEASE
P2-10 AND 6-6
For detailed information, refer to the page number listed, or see the Index inthe back of the owner’s manual.
8-12
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement